Home

ŠKODA Fabia Owner`s Manual

Contents

1. B Back up wheel 154 Ball head Check fitting 123 Fitting 123 Ready position 122 Removing 124 Belts 10 Belt tensioners 13 Bicycle carrier 76 Bonnet Closing 140 Opening 140 Boot Cover 71 Emergency unlocking 51 Fastening elements 70 Fixing nets 71 Folding hooks 71 see Boot lid 51 Unlocking the boot lid 51 Boot lid 51 automatic locking 51 Brake assist 115 Brake booster 104 Brake fluid 146 Changing 146 Checking 146 Display messages 36 Brakes Brake booster 104 Brake fluid 146 Handbrake 105 Indicator light 36 Running in 110 Braking Information for braking 104 Breakdown kit 162 Bulbs Changing In the rear light Button in the driver s door Electrical power windows C Car care 169 173 51 Washing Car computer see Multifunction display Caring for paintwork 127 129 29 131 81 Car park ticket holder Carrier 7I Central locking button Central locking system lock unlock Changing Brake fluid Bulbs Bulbs in the rear light Engine oil Foglight bulb Scout RS 47 45 47 47 146 169 173 144 172 Foglights and daytime running lights bulbs 172 Front parking light bulb Front turn signal bulb Fuses Fuses in the dash panel Fuses in the engine compartment 17 17 167 167 169 High beam bulb halogen project
2. Closing 54 Snow chains 156 Spare wheel 154 Speedometer 27 Speed symbol see Wheels 153 Spoiler 128 Stalk Main beam 58 Turn signals 58 START STOP 119 Operating conditions for the system 119 operation 120 system related automatic start up 120 START STOPP Manually deactivating activating the system _ 120 Starting and stopping the engine 102 Starting engine Jump starting 163 Starting the engine 103 Jump starting 164 START STOP Information messages 120 Jump starting 165 Steering wheel 8 Storage 81 Storage Compartment Lighting 61 Storage compartments 81 Sun visors 62 Switching lights on and off 56 Switching off the engine 103 Synthetic leather 135 T Tailgate 50 Taking care of the vehicle Natural leather 134 Seat belts 135 Taking care of your vehicle Automatic car wash system 130 Chrome parts 131 Cleaning the wheels 133 Door lock cylinders 132 Headlight lenses 132 High pressure cleaner 130 Plastic parts 131 Washing by hand 129 Wash system 130 Technical data 175 Telephone 93 Tiptronic 107 Tools 158 TOP TETHER 23 Tourist lights 59 Towing 165 Towing a trailer 121 Towing device Description 122 Drawbar load 121 Use and care 124 Towing eye Front 166 Rear 166 Towing protection 50 Traction Control System ASR 116 Trailer 121 125 Lo
3. Caring for vehicle paintwork 131 Plastic parts 131 Rubber seals 131 Chrome parts 131 Decorative films 132 Windows and exterior mirrors 132 Headlight lenses 132 Door lock cylinders 132 Underbody waxing 133 Wheels 133 Underbody protection 133 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle It may also be one of the requirements for the acceptance of warranty claims relating to corrosion damage and paint defects on the bodywork We recommend using care products from KODA Original Accessories that are available from SKODA Partners The instructions for use on the package must be observed D WARNING Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions Always keep the automobile care products safe from people who are not completely independent e g children there is a danger of poisoning a Protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts when clean ing the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims there is a risk of cuts EE CAUTION Do not use any insect sponges kitchen scrubbers or similar cleaning prod ucts there is a risk of damaging the paintwork finish a Cleaners containing solvents can damage the material being cleaned For the sake of the environment Used vehicle care product cans represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with nati
4. It is not possible on vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox to switch on the cruise control system if the selector lever is in the position P N or R The cruise control system may automatically switch off when some brake as sist systems e g ESC intervene when the speed exceeds maximum permissi ble engine speed or a similar event takes place Storing a speed Fig 114 Stalk Use cruise control A Read and observe H and on page 118 first Storing a speed gt Press switch A Fig 114 to the ON position gt After the desired speed has been reached press the rocker button B into the SET position After you have released the rocker button B out of the position SET the speed you have just stored is maintained at a constant speed without having to depress the accelerator Changing a stored speed A Read and observe H and H on page 118 first Increasing the speed with the accelerator gt Depress the accelerator to increase the speed gt Release the accelerator to reduce the speed back down to the preset speed However if the saved speed is exceeded by more than 10 km h for a period of more than 5 minutes by depressing the accelerator the stored speed is de leted from the memory The speed must then be saved again Increasing the speed with the rocker button gt Press rocker button B Fig 114 on page 118 to the RES position gt The speed will increase continuously if the rocker button is
5. Make sure that the function of the wiper and the condition of the wiper blades are free of any defects J Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside v Adjust the rear view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed JV Ensure that the mirrors are not covered 6 Safety J Check the tyre inflation pressure v Check the engine oil brake fluid and coolant level JV Secure all items of luggage Y Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the vehicle risk of accident v Close all doors and the engine compartment and luggage compartment lid JV Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals Y Protect children in suitable child seats with correctly fastened seat belts page 19 Transporting children safely v Adopt the correct seated position page 7 Correct and safe seated position Tell your passengers to assume the correct seated position Driving safety A Read and observe H on page 6 first The driver is fully responsible for himself and his occupants If your driving safety is effected you place yourself and the oncoming traffic at risk The following guidelines must therefore be observed v Do not get distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation e g by your passengers or mobile phone calls v Never drive when your driving ability is impaired e g through medication alcohol or drugs J Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible spe
6. 106 Driving EE CAUTION f the selector lever is shifted to N while the vehicle is being driven you must lift off the accelerator pedal and you will need to wait until the engine has reached its idling speed before shifting the selector lever to a forward driving mode again At temperatures below 10 C the engine can only be started in selector lev er position P Never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator pedal when stopping ona hill this may lead to transmission damage FF Note The ignition key can only be withdrawn once the ignition has been switched off if the selector lever is in the P position Modes and use of selector lever 10 14 Da 1 Consumption B 53 100km 18 5 C km trip 12440 1253 2 a Fig 105 Selector lever MAXI DOT display Selector lever positions A Read and observe H and on page 106 first When the ignition is switched on the gearbox mode and the gear currently se lected are indicated in the display 1 Fig 105 The following modes can be selected with the selector lever Fig 105 P Parking mode The driven wheels are locked mechanically in this mode Parking mode must only be selected when the vehicle is stationary R Reverse gear Reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary and the en gine is at idling speed Depress the brake pedal and simultaneously press the shiftlock in the selector lever grip before shifting to R fro
7. H WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed if carrying a spare canis ter in the vehicle We do not recommend carrying any fuel canisters in your vehicle for safety reasons In the event of an accident this could be dam aged and fuel could escape there is a risk of fire ET CAUTION a Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring which can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine and exhaust system Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle s paintwork there is a risk of paint damage a If the vehicle was not purchased in the country in which it was intended to be operated you should check whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in the country where the vehicle will be operated You should also perhaps check whether the manufacturer has recommended a different fuel for operation of the vehicle in the country concerned Is this not the case then you must check whether the manufacturer permits operation of the vehicle with another fuel type Refuelling Fig 123 Open tank lid tank cap A Read and observe H and on page 136 first Open fuel filler flap gt Open the fuel filler flap with one hand Fig 123 A gt Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and unlock it by moving it to the left with the vehicle key gt Unscrew the filler cap by turning it anticlockwise and
8. Fig 10 Location of the side airbag in the driver s seat gas filled side air bag In the event of severe side collisions the side airbag system provides addition al protection for the upper body chest stomach and pelvis of passengers in the vehicle The side airbags are housed in the upholstery of the seat backrests of the front seats Fig 10 A The head airbag and belt tensioner on the relevant side are also automatically deployed when the side airbags Fig 10 B are deployed The load of the occupants is cushioned when plunging into the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the entire upper body chest stomach and pel vis is reduced on the side facing the door H WARNING Information on correct seating position a Your head should never be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag You might suffer severe injuries in the event of an accident This ap plies in particular to children who are transported without using a suitable child safety seat page 21 Child safety and side airbag There must not be any further persons animals or objects positioned be tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag No accesso ries such as cup holders should be attached to the doors a f children adopt an incorrect seated position when travelling they may be exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident This can result in serious injuries page 19
9. Fitting gt Insert both ends of the flexible storage compartment into the openings of the right side trim panel of the boot and push it downwards until it locks Removing gt Grasp the flexible storage compartment on the two upper corners gt Press the upper corners inwards and release the storage compartment by pulling upwards gt Remove by pulling towards you EH CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects with a maxi mum total weight of 8 kg EF Note If the variable loading floor page 73 is installed in the luggage compartment no flexible storage compartment can be installed H Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Air outlets 86 Using the air conditioning system economically 86 Operational problems 86 The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature thus full heat output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature If the cooling system is switched on the temperature and air humidity drops in the vehicle The cooling system prevents the windows from misting up when outside temperatures are particularly low It is possible to briefly activate recirculated air mode to enhance the cooling effect Please refer to the information regarding recirculated air mode for the air con ditioning system page 90 or for Climatronic page 92 U WARNING For your own safety and that of other road us
10. gt Check the tyre pressure on the installed spare wheel as soon as possible Emergency equipment and self help 159 gt Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench as soon as possible gt Change the damaged wheel or consult a specialist garage about repair possi bilities EF Note a f it is determined that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when changing the wheel the bolts must be replaced before checking the tightening torque Drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed until the tightening torque has been checked Loosening tightening wheel bolts Fig 141 Changing a wheel Loosening the wheel bolts PSS B53 0541 Q Read and observe H on page 158 first Undoing gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop gt Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt about one turn in the direction of the arrow Fig 141 Tightening gt Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt as far as the stop gt Grip the wrench at its end and turn the bolt against the direction of the ar row Fig 141 until it is tight HE WARNING Undo the wheel bolts only a little about one turn until the vehicle has been jacked up Otherwise the wheel could come off and fall down there is a risk of injury 1 Use the appropriate adapter for undoing and tightening the anti theft wheel bolts page 161 160 Do it yourself FI Note If it pro
11. illuminates after the ignition is switched on The warning light should go out after driving a short distance lt gt Windscreen washer fluid level N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the windscreen washer fluid level is too low the warning light amp comes on The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Top up wash fluid Top up with liquid page 141 lt Traction control TCS switched off N Read and observe H on page 35 first The ASR is switched off by pressing the button page 116 and the warning light amp illuminates The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Traction control ASR deactivated lt a gt Turn signal system A Read and observe H on page 35 first Either the left lt or right gt gt warning light flashes depending on the position of the turn signal lever If a turn signal light fails the warning light flashes at twice its normal rate Switching off the hazard warning light system is switched on will cause all of the turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash Further information page 58 Turn signal and main beam lights z0 Low beam N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 20 comes on when low beam is selected page 56 0 Fog lights N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light comes on when the fog lights are operating page 58 Instruments and Indicator Lights 41 QO Read and obse
12. Front airbags Fig 8 Driver airbag in the steering wheel front passenger airbag in the dashboard BNH 0019 Fig 9 Safe distance to steering wheel inflated airbags In the event of a severe frontal collision the front airbag system offers addi tional protection for the head and chest area of the driver and front passenger The front airbag for the driver is housed in the steering wheel Fig 8 A The front airbag for the front seat passenger is located in the dash panel above the glove compartment Fig 8 B The airbags inflate in front of the driver and front passenger when they are deployed Fig 9 D The forward movement of the driver and of the front passenger is cushioned when they make contact with the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to head and chest is thus reduced Airbagsystem 15 EN WARNING Information on correct seating position For the driver and front passenger it is important to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard A Fig 9 Not keeping to this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you risk of death The front seats and the head restraints must always also be correctly adjusted to match the body size of the occupant The airbag develops enormous forces when triggered which can lead to injuries if the sitting position or seated position is not correct There must not by any further
13. Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 64 Windscreen wipers Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades 64 Windscreen washer fluid 141 Winter Deicing windows 132 Winter operation Snow chains 156 Winter tyres See Wheels 156 Winter use 156 Winter tyres 156 X XDS 116 Index 191 KODA AUTO a s pursues a policy of constant product and model develop ment We trust that you will understand that changes to models in terms of shape equipment and engineering may be introduced at any time The infor mation about appearance performances dimensions weight standards and functions of the vehicle is correct at the time of publication Some equipment may only be released later or may only be offered in certain markets Informa tion may be obtained from SKODA Partners It is therefore not possible for le gal claims to be made based on the data illustrations and descriptions con tained in this Owner s Manual Reprinting reproduction translation or any other use either in whole or in part is not permitted without the written consent of SKODA AUTO a s KODA AUTO a s expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws Subject to change Issued by KODA AUTO a s SKODA AUTO ass 2014 SKODA Service App SKODA Service in your pocket The SKODA Service application is designed for smartphones operating on iOS and Andriod systems and its purpose is to help SKODA AUTO customers in any difficult situation they may
14. hicle The vehicle might then move off there is the risk of an accident EE CAUTION Observe the recommendations on the new brake pads page 110 Never let the brakes slip with light pressure on the pedal if braking is not necessary This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and excessive wear Information for braking A Read and observe H and H on page 104 first If the brakes are applied in full and the control unit for the braking system con siders the situation to be dangerous for the following traffic the brake light flashes automatically After the speed was reduced below around 10 km h or the vehicle was stop ped the brake light stops flashing and the hazard warning light system switches on The hazard warning light system is switched off automatically af ter accelerating or driving off again Before travelling a long distance down a steep gradient reduce speed and shift into the next lowest gear As a result the braking effect of the engine will be used reducing the load on the brakes Any additional braking should be completed intermittently not continuously Wear and tear The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv ing style 104 Driving The brake pads wear more quickly if a lot of journeys are completed in towns and over short distances or if a very sporty style of driving is adopted Under these severe conditions the thicknes
15. page 36 Engine oil Check the oil level using the dipstick as soon as possible Add oil accordingly EE CAUTION Always check the oil level on vehicles with the 1 2 1 44 kW engine when the engine is cold Otherwise the measuring result is incorrect und oil could be in correctly replenished risk of engine damage a The oil level must never be above the A range Fig 128 there is a risk of damaging the exhaust system Replenishing A Read and observe H and H on page 142 first gt Check the oil level page 143 gt Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening Fig 126 on page 141 gt Replenish the oil in portions of 0 5 litres in accordance with the correct speci fications page 142 gt Check the oil level page 143 gt Carefully screw on the oil filler opening cap and push the dipstick in fully Changing N Read and observe H and H on page 142 first The engine oil must be changed according to prescribed service intervals or ac cording to the Service plan service interval display CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Capacity 145 Checking the coolant level 145 Replenishing 145 144 General Maintenance The coolant consists of water with a concentration of coolant additive This mixture guarantees antifreeze protection protects the cooling heater system against corrosion and prevents the formation of scale Vehicles exported to coun
16. the cover gt Lift the lid upwards until it clicks into place A pin holder is located inside the lower flap E WARNING The storage compartments must always be closed when driving for safety reasons Fig 84 Storage compartment Using cooling system N Read and observe H on page 81 first gt Use the rotary switch Fig 84 to open and close the air supply 82 Using the system Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows cooled air to flow into the storage compartment Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in terior air to flow into the storage compartment We recommend closing the air supply if it is operated in heating mode or the cooling system for the storage compartment is not being used Storage compartment on the driver s side Fig 83 Dash panel Storage compart ment on the driver s side Co a B5J 0313 QO Read and observe H on page 81 first The open stowage compartment below the light switch Fig 85 Map pockets in the front seats Fig 86 Front seat rests Map pockets N Read and observe H on page 81 first Map pockets are located on the rear of the seat backrests Fig 86 The map pockets are intended for storage of maps magazines etc E WARNING Never put heavy items in the map pockets risk of injury EE CAUTION Do not put any large items such as bottles or sharp objects into the map pock e
17. Bluetooth Settings Back Phone book The Phone book menu item lists the contacts downloaded from the telephone memory and the mobile phone SIM card Dial number Any telephone number can be entered in the Dial number menu item The re quired numbers must be selected one after the other using adjustment wheel and confirmed by pressing the adjustment wheel You can select digits 0 9 symbols X and the Cancel Call and Delete functions Call lists The following menu items can be selected in the Call lists menu item Missed calls Dialled numbers Received calls Voice mailbox In the Voice mailbox menu item you can set the number of the voice mailbox and then dial the number Communication and multimedia 97 Bluetooth The following menu items can be selected from the Bluetooth menu item User Overview of the stored users New user Search for new mobile phones in reception range Visibility Switches on the visibility of the phone for other devices Media Player Active device Paired devices Search Phone name option to change the name of the phone default SKODA_BT Settings The following menu items can be selected from the Settings menu item Phone book Update List Surname First name Ring tone Back Return in the Start menu of the telephone CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dialogue 98 Voice commands 99 D
18. CQ Introduction Fig 3 Driver wearing seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects The physical principle of a frontal collision 1 Fastening and unfastening seat belts 12 Belt height adjustment on the front seats 13 Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an accident They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival in the event of a major accident Correctly fastened seat belts hold occupants of the car in the correct seated position Fig 3 The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy energy of motion to a considerable extent They also prevent uncontrolled movements which in turn may well re sult in severe injuries The occupants of a vehicle who have fastened and correctly adjusted their seat belt benefit greatly from the fact that the kinetic energy is absorbed by the belts as much as possible The structure of the front end of the vehicle and other passive safety meas ures such as the airbag system also contribute to reducing the kinetic energy in the best possible way The energy produced is thus absorbed and there is less risk of injury Particular safety aspects must be observed when transporting children in the vehicle page 19 Transporting children safely 10 Safety E WARNING a Fasten your seat belt before each journey even when driving in town This also applies to the people seated at the rear there is
19. Diesel engines Fig 102 1 Fuel supply interrupted ignition switched off engine switched off the steering can be locked 2 Heating glow plugs on ignition switched on 3 Starting engine To lock the steering with the ignition key withdrawn turn the steering wheel until the steering locking pin engages audibly If the steering is locked and the key cannot be turned or can only be turned with difficulty to position 2 Fig 102 move the steering wheel back and forth and the steering lock will unlock EF Note We recommend locking the steering wheel whenever leaving the vehicle This acts as a deterrent against the attempted theft of your car Starting the engine A Read and observe H and on page 102 first Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped with a glow plug system The glow plug warning light oo lights up after the ignition has been switched on Start the engine once the ov warning light has gone out You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating period otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily Procedure for starting the engine gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Move the gearshift lever into neutral or move the selector lever into position PorN gt Switch on the ignition 2 Fig 102 on page 103 gt Depress and hold the clutch pedal vehicles with a manual gearbox or brake pedal vehicles with an automatic gearbox until the engine starts gt
20. Exhaust inspection system 39 ov Glow plug system diesel engine 39 EPC EPC fault light petrol engine 39 gt Diesel particulate filter diesel engine 39 D Fuel reserve 40 2r Airbag system 40 Tyre pressure 41 Windscreen washer fluid level 41 amp Traction control TCS switched off 41 amp Turn signal system 41 z0 Low beam 4 0 Fog lights 41 Cruise control system 42 Selector lever lock 42 ZO Main beam 42 The warning lights show certain functions faults and may be accompanied by audible signals H WARNING a f illuminated warning lights and the corresponding descriptions and warning notes are not observed this may result in severe injuries or major vehicle damage The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area There is a risk of injuries scalding accidents and fire when working in the engine compart ment e g inspecting and replenishing oil and other fluids It is essential to observe safety notes page 139 Engine compartment Handbrake N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light comes on if the handbrake is applied An audible warning is also given if you drive the vehicle for at least 3 seconds at a speed of more than 6 km h The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Release parking brake Instruments and Indicator Lights 35 Brake system A Read and observe H on page 35 first The indicator ligh
21. Range of sensors A Read and observe H and H on page 117 first The parking aid referred to below solely as system only works when the igni tion is switched on The system supports the driver via audible signals via the display on the radio or via the factory installed navigation system when parking and manoeu vring Radio user guide Navigation system user guide The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the bumper and an obstacle The ultrasonic sensors are integrated in the rear bumper Range of sensors The clearance warning begins at a distance of about 160 cm from the obstacle area A Fig 113 The interval between the warning signals becomes shorter as the clearance is reduced A continuous tone sounds from a distance of approx 30 cm area B danger area You should not reverse any further after this signal sounds On vehicles with a factory fitted towing device the border of the danger area Starts continuous tone 5 cm further away from the vehicle The length of the vehicle can be increased with an installed detachable towing device Activation deactivation A Read and observe H and H on page 117 first The system is activated automatically by engaging reverse gear This is con firmed by a brief audible signal The system is deactivated by disengaging reverse gear Assist systems 117 FF Note The system cannot be activated on vehicles with a factory fitted towing device
22. The most important notes are marked with the heading WARNING These WARNING notes draw your attention to a serious risk of accident or injury EE CAUTION A Caution note draws your attention to the possibility of damage to your vehicle e g damage to gearbox or points out general risks of an accident For the sake of the environment An Environmental note draws your attention to environmental protection as pects This is where you will for example find tips aimed at reducing your fuel consumption FI Note A normal Note draws your attention to important information about the opera tion of your vehicle You have opted for a SKODA our sincere thanks for your confidence in us You have received a vehicle with the latest technology and range of amenities Please read this Own er s Manual carefully because the operation in accordance with these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle If you have any questions about your vehicle please contact a SKODA Partner We hope you enjoy driving your SKODA and wish you a pleasant journey at all times Your KODA AUTO a s hereinafter referred to only as KODA or manufacturer b Terms used The on board literature contains the following terms relating to the service work for your vehicle gt Specialist garage a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for SKODA vehicles A specialist garage can be a SKODA partner a SKODA service partner or a
23. This can result in considerable damage to parts of the en gine and the exhaust system Counter for distance driven A Read and observe H on page 26 first The distance which you have driven with your vehicle is shown in km In some countries the measuring unit mile is used Daily trip counter trip The trip counter indicates the distance you have driven since it was last reset in steps of 100 metres or 1 10 of a mile Reset trip meter The meter can be reset by pressing and holding button 6 Fig 19 on page 26 Odometer The odometer indicates the total distance in kilometres or miles which the ve hicle has been driven FF Note If the second speed display is enabled on vehicles with a segment display this speed will be shown instead of the odometer Digital clock N Read and observe H on page 26 first The clock is set with buttons 5 and 6 Fig 19 on page 26 Select the display that you wish to change with the button 5 and carry out the change with the button 6 In vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display it is also possible to set the clock in the Time menu page 34 1 On models on which the speedometer indicates mph the second speed is displayed in km h 28 Using the system Display of the second speed N Read and observe H on page 26 first The display can show the current speed in mph This feature is provided for driving in countries with different units for speed MAXI DOT dis
24. Turn the key to position 3 to the stop and release immediately the engine has started do not depress the accelerator After letting go the vehicle key will return to position 2 If the engine does not start within 10 seconds turn the key to position 1 Re peat the start up process after approx half a minute Switching off the engine N Read and observe H and H on page 102 first Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key to position 1 Fig 102 on page 103 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Information for braking 104 Handbrake 105 Starting off and Driving 103 WARNING Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch ed off there is the risk of an accident The clutch pedal must be depressed when braking on a vehicle with man ual transmission when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs If you fail to do so the functionality of the brake servo can be impaired there is the risk of an accident a f a front spoiler full wheel trim etc is mounted retrospectively it must be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced The front brakes may overheat which can have a negative impact on the functioning of the braking system there is a risk of an accident When leaving the vehicle never leave persons who might for example release the handbrake or take the vehicle out of gear unattended in the ve
25. gt Replace the cover After closing the door it no longer be opened from the outside The door can be unlocked from the inside by pulling on the door handle again and then opened from the outside CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Individual settings 46 Safe securing 46 Unlocking the vehicle using the key 47 Locking the vehicle with the key 47 Vehicle locking unlocking from the inside 47 When using central locking or unlocking all doors are locked or unlocked si multaneously The boot lid is unlocked when opening It can be opened by pressing the handle above the licence plate page 51 Opening closing Unlocking andlocking 45 Warning light in the driver s door After locking the vehicle the warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system page 46 is not operat ing the warning light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash evenly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds If the indicator light first flashes fast for about 2 seconds then lights up for about 30 seconds continuously and then flashes slowly there is a fault in the central locking system or in the interior monitor and in the towing protec tion page 50 Seek help from a specialist garage Convenience operation of windows Th
26. page 110 Operational problems A Read and observe H and M on page 85 first If the cooling system does not operate at outside temperatures higher than 5 C there is a problem in the system The reasons for this may be gt One of the fuses has blown Check the fuse and replace if necessa ry page 167 gt The cooling system has switched off automatically for a short time because the coolant temperature of the engine is too hot page 27 If you are not able to resolve the fault yourself or if the cooling output has re Functions of the individual controls Fig 95 duced switch off the cooling system and obtain assistance from a specialist A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to garage the right to increase the temperature Set the blower level level 0 blower off level 4 the highest blower speed Heating Set the direction of the air outlet page 86 x Switch recirculation on off page 88 CQ Introduction Cae o l l Controls A and C Fig 95 can be set to any intermediate position This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation E WARNING Setting 88 The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting up Recirculated air mode 88 Operation Fig 95 Heating Control elements Heating and air conditioning 87 Setting Recommended basic settings of the heating controls Control dial settings Fig 95 on pag
27. the memory to zero if you want to measure the distance travelled from a par ticular moment page 30 Operation The maximum distance indicated in both memories is 1999 km or 9999 km on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display The indicator is reset to zero when this val ue is exceeded Average speed The average speed since the memory was last erased is displayed in km hour Set the memory to zero at the start of measurement to determine the average speed over a certain period page 30 Operation No value will appear in the display until you have driven approximately 300 m after this information has been deleted The display is updated regularly while you are driving Current speed The current speed identical to the display on the speedometer 3 Fig 19 on page 26 is displayed Oil temperature The current engine oil temperature is displayed If the oil temperature is lower than 50 C or if a fault in the system for checking the oil temperature is present only is displayed instead of the oil temperature 1 Applies for vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display 2 An initial value of 30 km h is displayed automatically if no value has been specified Warning against speeding The warning that the speed limit is being exceeded can be enabled disabled in the display page 31 Warning against speeding AN Read and observe H on page 29 first Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary gt Press butt
28. vacuum cleaner Clean soiled leather surfaces with a cotton or woollen cloth lightly moistened with water and then dry with a clean dry cloth Clean more severely soiled areas with a cloth soaked in a mild soap solution 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of water Use a cleaning agent specially developed for the purpose to remove stains Treat the leather with a suitable leather care product at suitable regular inter vals EE CAUTION Ensure that the leather is not soaked through at any point during cleaning and that no water gets into the stitching of the seams The leather would then become brittle and cracked Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to avoid the leather from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the leather from direct sunlight by covering it Sharp edged objects on items of clothing such as zip fasteners rivets sharp edged belts jewellery and pendants may leave permanent scratches or signs of rubbing on the surface Damage of this nature cannot later be recognized as a justified complaint The use of a mechanical steering wheel lock may damage the leather surface of the steering wheel Use a care cream with light blocker and impregnation effect on a regular ba sis and each time after cleaning The cream nourishes the leather allows it to breathe and keeps it supple and also provides moisture It also creates surface protec
29. Check that you can carry out the repairs with the breakdown kit page 161 Uncouple any trailer gt Remove the breakdown kit from the boot gt Stick the sticker 2 Fig 145 on page 162 on the dashboard in the driver s field of view gt Do not remove the foreign body e g screw or nail from the tyre gt Unscrew the valve cap gt Use the valve remover 1 to unscrew the valve core and place it on a clean surface rag paper etc Sealing and inflating the tyre AN Read and observe H on page 162 first Sealing gt Shake the tyre inflator bottle 10 Fig 145 on page 162 vigorously several times gt Firmly screw the inflation hose 3 onto the tyre inflator bottle 10 in a clock wise direction The film on the cap is pierced automatically gt Remove the plug from the inflation hose 3 and plug the open end fully onto the tyre valve gt Hold the bottle 10 with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre gt Remove the empty tyre inflator bottle from the valve gt Screw the valve core back into the tyre valve using the valve remover 1 Inflating gt Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose 5 Fig 145 on page 162 firmly onto the tyre valve gt Check that the air release valve 7 is closed gt Start the engine and run it in idle gt Plug the connector 9 into 12 Volt socket page 80 12 volt power outlet gt
30. Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury CAUTION During the winter it may be necessary to remove any ice and snow in the vicin ity of the sliding tilting roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism and seal If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected it is possible that the Sliding tilting roof does not close fully This is why the rotary switch must be set to position A Fig 38 on page 54 and pressed forwards for about 10 seconds 54 Using the system Operation Fig 38 Control dial for the power slid ing tilting roof A Read and observe H and F on page 54 first Comfort position gt Turn the switch to position C Fig 38 Open fully gt Turn the switch to position B Fig 38 and hold it in this position spring loaded position Tilting roof gt Turn the switch to position D Fig 38 Closing gt Turn the switch to position A Fig 38 Sun blind The sun blind is operated manually Force limiter The sliding tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter If an obstacle e g ice pre vents closing the sliding tilting roof stops and opens completely The sliding tilting roof can be closed completely without the force limiter by pushing the switch in position A Fig 38 forwards until the sliding tilting roof is com pletely closed page 54 H in section Introduction When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort posi
31. D or vice versa move the selector lever quickly This prevents modes R or N from being selec ted accidentally Manual gear shifting Tiptronic Fig 106 Selector lever multi function steering wheel A Read and observe H and on page 106 first Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev er or multifunction steering wheel This mode can be selected both while hal ted and while driving The gear currently selected is indicated in the display 1 Fig 105 on page 106 The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 28 Switching to manual shifting gt Push the gear selector from position D towards the right or left in a right hand drive vehicle Shifting up gears gt Press the selector lever forwards Fig 106 gt Pull the right hand paddle Fig 106 briefly towards the steering wheel Shifting down gears gt Press the selector lever backwards Fig 106 gt Pull the left hand paddle Fig 106 briefly towards the steering wheel Temporarily switching to manual gear shifting in mode D or S gt Pull one of the paddles Fig 106 briefly towards the steering wheel Manual gear shifting is deactivated if more than 1 minute passes after either of the paddles was pulled The temporary switch to manual gear shifting can also be deactivated by pulling the right hand paddle towards the steering wheel for more than 1 s
32. Desired tempera side windows ture Open and align with the side window Automatically switch Do not switch on edon To the stop to the The fastest heating right Briefly switch on Switched off Opening Desired tempera iure 2or3 Comfortable heating Do not switch on Switched off Opening To the left up to the stop briefly 4 then The fastest cooling gt or3 Briefly switch on Activated Opening Desired tempera iure 1 2 or 3 Optimal cooling Activated Open and align to the roof Do not switch on To the stop to the Fresh air mode ventilation left Desired position Do not switch on Switched off Opening a We recommend that you do not use this setting in countries with high humidity levels This can result in heavy cooling of the window glass and the following fogging from outside b Under certain conditions recirculated air mode page 90 may come on automatically the warning light will then light up in the button We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 94 on page 86 in the open position in all operating modes Recirculated air mode N Read and observe on page 89 first Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle getting in to the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the button The indicator light in the button l
33. Fig 95 on page 87 is turned to the position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by pressing the button again E WARNING Never leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period as stale air can cause fatigue in the driver and the passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increa ses Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 89 Setting the air conditioning system 90 Recirculated air mode 90 The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met v The cooling system is switched on page 89 J The engine is running J The outside temperature is above approximately 2 C v The blower switch is switched on positions 1 4 If the desired interior temperature can also be achieved without activating the cooling system fresh air mode should be selected If the coolant temperature is too high the cooling system is switched off to ensure that the engine cools down EE CAUTION Under certain circumstances air at a temperature of about 5 C can flow out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on a Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature for example when get ting out of the
34. H and on page 150 first Pulling off gt Push the extraction pliers page 158 sufficiently far onto the cap until the inner catches of the pliers are positioned at the collar of the cap gt Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 137 Wheels 155 Fitting gt Push the cap onto the wheel bolt up to the stop The wheel bolt caps are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the storage space for the spare wheel Wheel bolts N Read and observe H and on page 150 first Wheels and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design When ever you change the wheels fitted e g light alloy wheels or wheels with win ter tyres you must also use the matching wheel bolts of the correct length and shape of bolt head Correct fastening of the wheels depends on this CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Winter tyres 156 Snow chains 156 Winter tyres The handling of your vehicle will be significantly improved when driving on wintry roads if you fit winter tyres Summer tyres have less grip on ice snow and at temperatures below 7 C This is especially true of low profile tyres or high speed tyres To achieve the best possible handling properties winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels the minimum tread depth must be 4 mm and tyres must be no older than 4 years Winter tyres of a lower speed category can be used provided that the permissi
35. Press the lower button on the end of the armrest Fig 90 A gt Fold the arm rest forward and release the button again Opening the storage compartment gt Press the upper button and open the cover of the stowage compartment up wards Fig 90 B F Note The moving space of the arms can be restricted if the armrest is folded for wards In city traffic the armrest should not be folded forwards Storage compartments in the doors B5J 0571 Fig 91 Storage compartment in the front door in the rear door 84 Using the system A Read and observe H on page 81 first There is a bottle holder at B Fig 91 of the pocket in the front doors D WARNING Use the section A Fig 91 of the door pocket only for storing objects which do not project so that the effectiveness of the side airbag is not im paired Storage compartments in the boot Fig Sz Boot Storage compartments A Read and observe H on page 81 first The cover for the side compartment can be removed thus enlarging the boot gt Grasp the top part of the cover and carefully remove it in the direction of the arrow Fig 92 CAUTION The storage compartments are designed for storing small objects of up to 2 5 kg in weight in total Fig 93 Flexible storage compartment AOX Wi C A Read and observe H on page 81 first The flexible storage compartment Fig 93 can be fitted to the right hand side of the luggage compartment
36. Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch 8 gt Allow the air compressor to run until a pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is achieved Maximum run time of 8 minutes H gt Switch off the air compressor gt If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar unscrew the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve gt Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre gt Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose 5 back onto the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process gt If you cannot reach the required tyre inflation pressure here either this means the tyre has sustained too much damage You cannot seal with tyre with the breakdown kit H gt Switch off the air compressor gt Remove the tyre inflation hose 5 from the tyre valve Once a tyre pressure of 2 0 2 5 bar is reached the journey may be continued at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes page 163 WARNING The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be ing inflated there is a risk of injury Do not place the hot tyre inflation hose or hot air compressor on flamma ble materials there is a risk of fire f you cannot inflate the tyre to at least 2 0 bar this means the damage sustained was too serious The sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre Do not drive the vehicle Seek
37. adjuster makes it possible to adjust the routing of the front seat belts in the area of the shoulder to the body size gt Press the height adjuster and move up or down in the desired direc tion Fig 7 gt Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has correctly locked in place CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Inertia reel 13 Belt tensioners 13 Inertia reel Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel The seat belt can move freely when it is pulled slowly The seat belt is locked by the inertia reel when it is pulled suddenly The belts also lock under full braking under acceleration when driving down hill and when cornering U WARNING If the seat belt does not lock when it is pulled sharply have it inspected im mediately by a specialist garage Belt tensioners Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three point seat belts The three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a frontal collision of a certain severity The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened The fastened three point seat belts are automatically tensioned in the event of a collision with a certain severity Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of minor frontal collisions side and rear end
38. air fresheners to the dashboard risk of damage to the dash panel Do not stick any stickers on the inside of the rear windows the rear side win dows and in the vicinity of the heating elements on the windscreen or near the window aerial These may get damaged Do not clean the headlining with a brush risk of damage to the lining sur face Cleaners containing solvents can damage the material being cleaned Apply only a small amount of the cleaning and care product For the sake of the environment Used cans of vehicle care product represent hazardous waste that is harmful to the environment These must be disposed of in accordance with national legislation Note Because of the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any poten tial problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we rec ommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Natural leather A Read and observe H and on page 133 first Leather is a natural material with specific properties and requires regular cleaning and maintenance The leather should be cleaned on a regular basis depending on the amount of Wwear and tear Dust and dirt in pores and creases act as abrasives This leads to severe abra sion and the premature embrittlement of the leather surface 134 General Maintenance We recommend that you remove dust at regular short intervals with a cloth or
39. always responsible for the correct settings and use of the lights F Note The headlights may mist up temporarily When the driving lights are switched on the light outlet areas are free from condensation after a short time al though the headlight lenses may still be misted up around the edge This mist has no influence on the life of the lighting system 56 Using the system Parking and low beam lights Fig 40 Dash panel Light switch B5J 0586 N Read and observe H on page 56 first Light switch positions Fig 40 Switch on the parking light or parking lights on both sides page 60 Z0 Switch on low beam 0 Switching off lights except daytime running lights Switch on the front fog lamp page 58 Q Switch on the rear fog light page 59 FF Note a An audible warning signal will sound if the light switch is in the or 20 posi tion the ignition key is removed and the driver s door is opened The audible warning signal is switched off by means of the door contact when the driver s door is closed ignition off however the side lights remain on to illuminate the parked vehicle if necessary Always turn the light switch to the O position if you are leaving the vehicle and don t want to use the parking light Headlight beam adjustment Fig 41 Dash panel Lights and visibility N Read and observe H on page 56 first Turning the rotary switch Fig 41 from position to 3 gradually adj
40. be used until full charging is achieved Both cables must be disconnected before charging the battery with high amperages known as rapid charging The vent plugs of the vehicle battery should not be opened for charging H WARNING Quick charging the vehicle battery is dangerous and requires a special charger and specialist knowledge EE CAUTION On vehicles with the START STOP system the pole terminal of the charger must not be connected directly to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth page 165 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system Note We therefore recommend that vehicle batteries be rapid charged by a special ist garage Replacing A Read and observe H and M on page 147 first The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity voltage current and the same size as the original battery Suitable vehicle battery types can be pur chased from a specialist garage We recommend that the battery is replaced by a specialist garage where the new vehicle battery will be installed properly and the original battery will be disposed of in accordance with national regulations Disconnecting or reconnecting A Read and observe H and F on page 147 first The following functions are initially deactivated or are no longer able to oper ate faultlessly after the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnec ted Operation Operating measure Electrical power
41. caused by use are normal EE CAUTION Do not use leather cleaners on Alcantara seat upholstery Do not use solvents floor wax shoe cream stain remover or similar agents on Alcantara seat upholstery a Avoid leaving the vehicle for lengthy periods in bright sunlight to prevent the fabrics from bleaching If the vehicle is parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the fabrics against direct sunlight by covering them Some clothing materials such as dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when treated correctly This is particularly true for light coloured uphols tery This is not a defect in the seat cover but poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Seat covers N Read and observe H and H on page 133 first Electrically heated seats Do not wet clean the seat covers as this can damage the seat heating system Use a specific cleaning agent such as dry foam or similar to clean the covers Seats without seat heating Thoroughly vacuum the seat covers with a vacuum cleaner before cleaning Clean the seat covers with a damp cloth or cleaning agents particularly formu lated for them Compressed areas created on the fabrics by everyday use can be removed by brushing against the nap with a lightly moistened brush Always treat all parts of the upholstery so that no visible boundaries are cre ated Then leave the seat to dry c
42. collisions in the case of a rollover and also not in accidents in which no major forces are produced from the front U WARNING Any work on the belt tensioner system including removal and installation of system components because of other repair work must only be carried out by a specialist garage The protective function of the system is only adequate for a single acci dent If the belt tensioners have been deployed it is then necessary to re place the entire system Note Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed This is not an in dication of a fire in the vehicle a When disposing of the vehicle or parts of the belt tensioner system it is im portant to comply with national legal requirements SKODA service partners are familiar with these regulations and will be able to provide you with de tailed information Seatbelts 13 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects System description 14 Airbag deployment 14 HE WARNING An airbag can only offer you optimal protection in combination with a fastened seat belt The airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt but instead forms part of the complete passive vehicle safety concept a TO ensure passengers are protected with the greatest possible effect when the airbag is deployed the front seats must be correctly adjusted to match the body size page 7 Correct and safe seated position f you do n
43. cross member A gt Press the holders B until they latch Tighten the securing screws C 76 Using the system gt Check how well the cross member is fastened by pulling on it Fig 74 Install bicycle carrier Ka B5J 0301 N Read and observe H and M on page 76 first gt Position the approved bicycle carrier on the cross member gt Remove bolt A Fig 74 a little and push the frame side rail aluminium part towards the cross member until the socket latches gt Insert the screw A into the nut gt Undo the screw B on the movable part of the bicycle carrier and unscrew gt Place the movable part of the fixture depending on the size of the vehicle in one of the possible positions so that the bicycle does not touch the boot lid We recommend to place the moveable part of the fixture in such a position that 7 holes are visible between the screw A and the moveable part gt Insert the screw B into the desired position and tighten Put bicycle into the bicycle carrier Fig 75 Putin the bicycle example fastening the front wheel A Read and observe H and M on page 76 first gt Remove the front wheel of the bicycle before installing it gt Slacken the quick tension jack on the fixing axle of the bicycle carrier and ad just according to the width of the bicycle fork gt Place the bicycle fork on the fixing axle and tighten with the quick release lever Fig 75 A gt Position the le
44. damaging the en gine Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the engine has been operated over a prolonged period at high loads but leave it to run at an idling speed for about 1 minute This prevents any possible accumula tion of heat when the engine is switched off For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary If possible start your journey as soon as the engine has started Through this the engine rea ches its operating temperature more rapidly and the pollutant emissions are lower FF Note The radiator fan can intermittently continue to run for approximately 10 mi nutes after the ignition has been switched off Electronic immobilizer CQ Read and observe H and 1 on page 102 first An electronic chip is integrated in the head of the key The immobiliser is deac tivated with the aid of this chip when the key is inserted in the ignition lock The electronic immobiliser is automatically activated when the ignition key is withdrawn from the lock The engine will not start if a non authorized ignition key is used The MAXI DOT display shows the following Immobilizer active Ignition lock Fig 102 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock A Read and observe H and on page 102 first Petrol engines Fig 102 1 Ignition switched off engine off the steering can be locked 2 Ignition switched on 3 Starting engine
45. distance Traction Control System ASR N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light flashes amp to show that the ASR is currently operating If the warning light comes on immediately after starting the engine the ASR can be switched off for technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again The TCS is fully functional again if the warning light does not light up after you switch the engine back on If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ASR The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Error Traction control ASR Seek help from a specialist garage The fact that the TCS system operates together with the ABS means that the TCS warning light will also come on if the ABS system is not operating proper ly Further information page 116 Traction Control System ASR Note The 5 warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on if the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected The warning light should go out after the vehicle has driven a short distance Antilock brake system ABS N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Error ABS The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS Seek help from a specialist garage EN WARNING f you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehi
46. eye gt In order to reinstall the cap after screwing out the towing eye insert it in the mounts and then press on the right side of the cap The cap must engage firmly EE CAUTION The towing eye must always be screwed in fully and firmly tightened other wise the towing eye can tear when towing in or tow starting 166 Do it yourself Rear towing eye Fig 149 Rear towing eye N Read and observe on page 165 first The rear towing eye is located below the rear bumper on the right Fig 149 Vehicles with a tow hitch N Read and observe H on page 165 first The removable towing ball may be fitted and used for towing on vehicles with a factory fitted tow hitch page 121 Towing a trailer Towing the vehicle using the towing device is a viable alternative solution to using the towing eye CAUTION The detachable ball rod and or the vehicle can be damaged if an unsuitable tow bar is used Note The detachable ball rod must always be in the vehicle so that it can be used for towing if necessary O Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Fuses in the dash panel 167 Fuses in the engine compartment 169 Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses gt Before replacing a fuse switch off the ignition and the appropriate consumer gt Find out which fuse belongs to the component that is not operat ing page 167 Fuses in the dash pane
47. for example when get ting out of the vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle getting in to the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching on gt Press the button Fig 97 on page 91 The display shows the icon Switching off gt Press the lt button Fig 97 on page 97 again The amp icon in the display goes out E WARNING Never leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period as stale air can cause fatigue in the driver and the passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increa ses Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist Up Note If recirculated air mode is switched on for around 15 minutes the symbol gt will begin to flash in the display as a sign that the recirculated air mode is switched on long term If the recirculated air mode is not switched off the symbol flashes for around 5 minutes Controlling the blower The Climatronic system controls the blower stages automatically in line with the interior temperature However the blower level can be manually adjusted to suit your particular needs gt Turn control dial 10 Fig 97 on page 97 to the left or to the right to increase or decrease the blower speed If the blower is switch
48. help from a specialist garage TE CAUTION Switch off the air compressor after running 8 minutes at the latest there is a risk of overheating Allow the air compressor to cool a few minutes before switching it on again Check after 10 minutes driving QN Read and observe H on page 162 first Check the tyre inflation pressure after driving for 10 minutes If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or less gt Do not drive the vehicle You cannot properly seal with tyre with the breakdown kit If the tyre pressure is 1 3 bar or more gt Adjust the tyre pressure to the correct value again see inside of fuel filler Cap gt Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum speed of 80 km h 50 mph CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle 164 Jump starting in vehicles with the START STOP system 165 Emergency equipment and self help 163 E WARNING a A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be low 0 C If the battery is frozen do not jump start with the battery of an other vehicle there is a risk of explosion a Pay attention to the warning instructions relating to working in the en gine compartment page 139 a The non insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each other there is a risk of short circuit The jump start cable connected to the po
49. immediately stopped by releasing the key or the respective button Operational faults A Read and observe H and M on page 52 first Electrical power windows do not operate If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected while the window was opened the electrical power windows will not operate The system must be activated Proceed as follows to re establish the function gt Switch on the ignition gt Pull the top edge of the button in the driver s door and close the window gt Release the button gt Pull the relevant button upwards again for another approximately 3 seconds and hold Operation in winter In the winter ice on the window may cause greater resistance as the window is closed The window will stop and open again by several centimetres It is necessary to deactivate the force limiter to close the window page 53 Unlocking and locking 53 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 54 Comfort operation 55 Emergency operation 55 The sliding tilting roof is operated with the rotary switch Fig 38 on page 54 and only works when the ignition is switched on The control dial has several positions The sliding tilting roof can still be opened closed and tilted for approx 10 mi nutes after switching the ignition off However as soon as one of the front doors is opened it is no longer possible to operate the sliding tilting roof H WARNING
50. intervals see the Serviceplan chap ter service schedules 32 Using the system Prompt in the segment display Tey Lica Fig 23 238 Example of a message BO UU en Vee Oil change service If an oil change service is due the 4 icon and the number 1is displayed at the position identified with the arrow for approximately 10 seconds Fig 23 The icon is shown together with the days and kilometres remaining to the next service As soon as the service due date is reached the flashing icon and the mes sage OIL CHNG appears in the display for about 20 seconds after the ignition is switched on Inspection If an inspection is due the icon and the number 2 are displayed at the posi tion identified with the arrow for approximately 10 seconds Fig 23 The icon is shown together with the days and kilometres remaining to the next service As soon as the due date for the service is reached the flashing icon and the INSPEC _ message appear in the display for about 20 seconds after the igni tion has been switched on Display the days and distance until the next service You can press button 5 Fig 19 on page 26 repeatedly to display the remain ing distance and time to until the next service whenever the ignition is switch ed on The icon appears together with the icon and the distance and time to the next service appear in the display for about 10 seconds The distance and the days remaining
51. is fixed in place with a special bolt Fig 136 Taking the wheel out gt Open the tailgate gt Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment gt Remove the box with the tool kit gt Unscrew the nut Fig 136 anticlockwise gt Take out the wheel Stowing the wheel gt Place the wheel into the spare wheel well with the wheel rim pointing down ward gt Screw on the nut Fig 136 clockwise until the wheel is safely secured gt Replace the box with the tool kit into the spare wheel and secure it with the tape gt Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment gt Close the tailgate Install a wheel of the appropriate version and dimensions as soon as possible If the dimensions or design of the spare wheel differ from the tyres fitted to the vehicle e g winter tyres or low profile tyres it must only be used briefly in the event of a puncture and if an appropriately cautious style of driving is adopted H Temporary spare wheel A yellow warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel Please note the following if you intend to use the temporary spare wheel gt The warning label must not be covered after installing the wheel gt Be specially attentive when driving gt The temporary spare is inflated to the maximum inflation pressure for the vehicle Fig 133 on page 152 gt Only use this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is not intend
52. it click into place gt Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock A plastic knob in the belt webbing holds the belt tongue in a position which is easy to get hold of It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the maximum protection The shoulder part of the seat belt must never run across the neck but must roughly run over the middle of the shoulder and fit snugly against the chest The lap part of the belt must run across the pelvis must not be lie across the stomach and must always fit snugly Fig 6 c Expectant women must also always wear a seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child The lap part of the belt must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis on expectant mothers to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo men Fig 6 D Release Release the seat belt only when the vehicle is stationary gt Press the red button in the belt buckle Fig 5 B the lock tongue pops out gt Manually guide the belt back so that it is easier to fully roll up the webbing the seat belt does not twist EE CAUTION When releasing the seatbelt ensure that the tongue of the lock does not dam age the door trim or other parts of the interior Belt height adjustment on the front seats Fig 7 Front seat Seat belt height ad juster pg Vien A Read and observe H on page 10 first The seat belt height
53. km h 270 km h ESL lt ICHUD EE CAUTION The information about the load index and the speed symbol for your vehicle are listed in your vehicle documents Unidirectional tyres A Read and observe H and F on page 150 first The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked by arrows on the wall of the tyre The direction of rotation indicated must be complied with to obtain the best benefits from the characteristics of these tyres These characteristics are principally the following gt Increased driving stability gt Reduced risk of aquaplaning gt Reduced tyre noise and reduced tyre wear Wheels 153 Tyre pressure monitor Fig 135 Button for setting the tyre infla tion pressure control value Bea N Read and observe H and H on page 150 first System settings A system configuration must be run as follows after adjusting the tyre pres sure after changing one or more wheels changing the position of a wheel on the vehicle e g swapping the wheels between the axles or when the warning light lights up while driving gt Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure page 41 Tyre pressure gt Switch on the ignition gt Press the i Fig 135 symbol button for longer than 2 seconds If the warning light lights up and does not go out after the system configu ration this indicates a system fault If the warning light flashes 4 there is a system fault Tyre pressure indicator The war
54. mirrors are therefore only of limited use for estimating distances to the fol lowing vehicles Whenever possible use the interior mirror for estimating the distances to the following vehicles Manually dimmed rear view mirror QO Read and observe H on page 65 first Basic setting gt Adjust the lever at the lower edge of the mirror towards the windshield Dimming mirror gt Pull the lever on the lower edge of the mirror away from the windscreen Exterior mirrors Fig 53 Inner part of door Knob for the mirrors E S 0 6 R A l Q Read and observe H on page 65 first The knob can be moved into the following positions L Adjust the left mirror R Adjust the right mirror 0 Switch off mirror control Gl Mirror heater The mirror can be adjusted to the desired position by moving the knob in the direction of the arrow Fig 53 The movement of the mirror surface follows the movement of the rotary knob Folding in the exterior mirrors The whole exterior mirror can be manually folded towards the side windows Restore it to its original position it should be folded back from the side win dow until it audibly clicks into place Note The exterior mirror heater only operates when the engine is running Do not touch the surface of the exterior mirrors if the exterior mirror heater is switched on f the power setting function fails at any time the exterior mirrors can be set by hand by pressing
55. of the headlights must be added to the windscreen washer fluid Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when re plenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be con taminated which can cause the windscreen washer system to malfunction CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Specifications and capacity 142 Checking the oil level 143 Replenishing 144 Changing 144 The engine has been factory filled with a high grade oil that can be use throughout the year except in extreme climate zones Engine oils are the subject of continuous further development Thus the infor mation stated in this Owner s Manual is only correct at the time of publication SKODA Service Partners are informed about the latest changes by the manu facturer We therefore recommend that you have the oil changed by a SKODA Service Partner 142 General Maintenance The specifications VW standards stated in the following can be indicated sep arately or together with other specifications on the bottle The oil capacities include oil filter change Check the oil level when filling do not over fill The oil level must be between the markings page 143 E WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 139 Do not continue your jou
56. on the edge of the mirror surface Contact your specialist garage if there is a fault with the electrical adjust ment of the exterior mirrors Lights and visibility 65 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the front seats Version 1 66 Adjusting the front seats Variant 2 66 Front seat heating 67 The driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the pedals can be fully pressed to the floor with slightly bent legs The seat backrest on the driver s seat should be adjusted in such a way that the upper point of the steering wheel can be easily reached with slightly bent arms Correct adjustment of the seats is particularly important for the following rea sons gt Reaching the controls safely and quickly gt A relaxed and fatigue free body position gt Achieving the maximum protection offered by the seat belts and the airbag system D WARNING Only adjust the driver s seat when the vehicle is stationary there is the risk of an accident Caution when adjusting the seat You may suffer injuries or bruises as a result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention Never carry more people than the number of seats in the vehicle Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat other than ob jects e g child safety seat intended for this purpose there is the risk of an accident FF Note After a certain time play can dev
57. paired Detailed information on this is provided in the operating instructions for your mobile phone 1 Depending on the Bluetooth version on the mobile phone an automatically generated 6 digit PIN is ei ther displayed or the PIN 1234 has to be entered manually Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connection is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection 2 96 Using the system The following steps must be carried out for the connection gt Activate Bluetooth and the visibility of your mobile phone on your tele phone gt Switch on the ignition gt Select the Phone New user menu in the MAXI DOT display and wait until the control unit has completed the search gt Select your mobile phone from the menu of the units found gt Confirm the PIN gt If the hands free system announces as standard SKODA_BT on the display of the mobile phone enter the PIN within 30 seconds and wait until the connection is established gt To finish pairing confirm the creation of the new user profile in the MAXI DOT display If there is no free space available to create a new user profile delete an exist ing user profile During the connecting procedure no other mobile phone may be connected with the hands free system Up to four mobile phones can be paired with the h
58. persons animals or objects positioned be tween the front seated occupants and the deployment area of the airbag H WARNING Front airbag and transporting children Never transport children on the front seat of a vehicle without using a proper restraint system If airbags are deployed in the event of an accident the child might suffer severe or even fatal injuries a It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if you are using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel page 17 Deactivating airbags If this is not done there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if the front passenger airbag is deployed When transporting a child on the front passenger seat pay attention to any relevant national regulations re garding the use of child safety seats Ey WARNING General information The steering wheel and the surface of the airbag module in the dash pan el on the passenger side must not have stickers attached be covered or modified in any other way These parts should only be cleaned with a cloth that is dry or has been moistened with water No objects such as cup hold ers mobile phone mounts etc must be attached to the covers of the air bag modules or be located within their immediate vicinity Never place objects on the surface of the front passenger airbag module in the dash panel 16 Safety Side airbags
59. plate The cap must engage firmly 172 Do it yourself Fabia Scout Fabia RS foglights Fig 159 Front bumper Fabia Scout Fabia RS Fig 160 Front bumper Fog lights fog lights Replacing the light bulb A Read and observe H and H on page 170 first Removing the cap and fog light gt Insert the tool into the opening above the fog light Fig 159 A Fabia Scout page 158 Vehicle tool kit and remove the cover gt Insert a finger into the opening next to the foglight Fig 159 B Fabia RS and remove the cap gt AlUnscrew page 158 Vehicle tool kitthe screws Fig 160 with the screw driver gt Remove the fog lamp Changing light bulbs and installing fog lights gt Press the locking tab 1 Fig 160 on the connector A and remove the con nector from the bulb holder B gt Turn the bulb holder B and bulb in the direction of the arrow to the stop and remove gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder and new bulb and turn in the oppo site direction to that of the arrow to the stop gt Insert the plug A into the socket B gt Retighten the screws and insert the cap The cap must engage firmly Changing the licence plate light bulb Fig 161 Boot lid Licence plate light A Read and observe H and M on page 170 first gt Insert a flat screwdriver into the opening in the area of the arrow Fig 161 and carefully press towards the centre of the lamp the lamp pops ou
60. pressed and held in the RES position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory Decreasing the speed gt The stored speed can be reduced by pressing rocker button B Fig 114 on page 118 to the SET position gt The speed will decrease continuously if the rocker button is pressed and held in the SET position Release the rocker button once the desired speed is reached The set speed is then stored in the memory gt If the rocker button is released at a speed below around 25 km h the speed is not stored and the memory is erased The speed must then be stored again by pressing rocker button B to the SET position after increasing the speed of the vehicle to more than around 25 km h The speed can also be reduced by depressing the brake pedal which tempora rily deactivates the system Switching off temporarily A Read and observe H and F on page 118 first The cruise control system can be temporarily switched off by pushing switch A Fig 114 on page 118 to the spring loaded CANCEL position or by depress ing the brake or clutch pedal The set speed remains stored in the memory Briefly push rocker button B to the RES position to resume the set speed af ter the clutch or brake pedal is released Switching off completely A Read and observe H and on page 118 first gt Press switch A Fig 114 on page 718 to the right to the OFF position CQ I
61. pressure when the tyres are cold Avoiding unnecessary ballast N Read and observe M on page 110 first Transporting ballast costs fuel Each kilogramme of weight increases the fuel consumption Therefore we rec ommend that you carry no unnecessary weight It is particularly in town traffic when one is accelerating quite often that the vehicle weight will have a significant effect upon the fuel consumption A rule of thumb here is that an increase in weight of 100 kilograms will cause an in crease in fuel consumption of about 1 litre 100 kilometres At a speed of 100 120 km h a vehicle fitted with a roof rack cross member without a load will use about 10 more fuel than normal due to the increased aerodynamic drag Regular maintenance AN Read and observe M on page 110 first A poorly tuned engine uses an unnecessarily high amount of fuel By having your vehicle regularly maintained by a specialist garage you create the conditions needed for driving economically The maintenance state of your vehicle has a positive effect on traffic safety and value retention A poorly tuned engine can result in a fuel consumption which is 10 higher than normal Check the oil level at regular intervals e g when refuelling Oil consumption is dependent to a considerable extent on the load and speed of the engine Oil consumption could be as high as 0 5 litres 1 000 km depending on your style of driving It is quite normal that a
62. restraint system on a seat which is protec ted by an active airbag installed in front of it This could cause serious injury to the child even death L 7 Fig 13 Sticker on the B column on the 5 front passenger side 20 Safety Fig 14 Front passenger sun visor label Q Read and observe H on page 19 first For safety reasons we recommend that you install child seats on the rear seats whenever possible The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the child is carried on the front passenger seat gt It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel H gt Adjust the front passenger seat back as vertically as possible so that there is firm contact passenger seat back and the child seat back gt Where possible move the front passenger seat back so that there is no con tact between the front seat and the child seat behind gt In the case of Group 2 or 3 child seats make sure that the deflector pulley mounted on the child seat headrest is in front of or level with the pulley on the B pillar on the passenger side gt Set the height adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible gt Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible gt Place and fasten the child seat on the seat and the child in the child seat ac cording to the specifications in the manufacturer
63. roof ensure that the opened Sliding tilting roof does not strike any items of luggage transported on the roof a Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened The height of the vehicle changes after mounting a roof luggage rack system and the load that is secured to it Compare the vehicle height with available clearances such as underpasses and garage doors a Always remove the roof luggage rack system before entering an automated car wash a Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the secured load For the sake of the environment The increased aerodynamic drag results in a higher fuel consumption FF Note If the vehicle is not factory equipped with a roof rack it can be purchased from the SKODA Original Accessories 78 Using the system Attachment points Fig 77 Attachment points for roof bars CQ Read and observe H and H on page 78 first Perform the assembly and disassembly according to the enclosed instructions EE CAUTION Observe the information regarding the assembly and disassembly in the en closed instructions Roof load A Read and observe H and on page 78 first The maximum permissible roof load including roof rack system of 75 kg and the maximum permissible total weight of the vehicle should not be exceeded The full permissible roof load cannot be used if a roof rack system with a lower load carrying capacity is used In this case the roof rack system must only be loade
64. seats with the locking eyes Transporting children safely 23 5 6 7 8 9 10 TI 12 13 14 15 16 G i Fig 18 Cockpit 24 Using the system Using the system es SJ o R 8 S 8 SI 8 Overview 1 Door opening lever 44 2 Electrical power windows 52 3 Electric exterior mirror adjustment 65 4 Air outlet vents 86 5 Parking ticket holder 81 6 Operating stalk gt Turn signal light headlight and parking light headlight flasher 58 gt Speed regulating system 118 Steering wheel gt With horn gt With driver s front airbag 15 gt With pushbuttons for radio navigation system and mobile phone 93 Instrument cluster Instruments and warning lights 26 9 Operating stalk gt Windscreen wiper and wash system 63 gt Multifunction display 29 gt MAXI DOT display 33 Button for rear window heater 62 m TCS switch 116 12 Air outlets in the central part of the dash panel 86 13 Button for hazard warning light system 60 Warning light for the deactivated front seat passenger airbag 18 15 Depending on equipment fitted gt Operating controls for the heating 87 gt Operating controls for the air conditioning system 88 gt Operating controls for Climatronic 91 Storage compartments on the front passenger side 82 Front passenger airbag 15 Air outlet vents 86 Key operated switch for the front seat passenger airba
65. seconds it starts to roll back HHC is active on slopes of gt 5 when the driver door is closed HHC is always only active on slopes pulling away forwards or in reverse When driving down hill it is inactive Antilock Braking System ABS A Read and observe H and on page 115 first ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking Thus helping the driver to maintain control of the vehicle The intervention of the ABS is noticeable from the pulsating movements of the brake pedal which is accompanied by noises When the ABS system is active do not pump the brakes or lift off the brake pedal Traction Control System ASR Fig 112 TCS button N Read and observe H and H on page 115 first If the wheels are slipping the ASR system adapts the engine speed to the con ditions of the road surface The TCS makes it much easier to start off acceler ate and climb steep hills even if the conditions of the road surface are unfav ourable 116 Driving The ASR function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on During an intervention of the system the TCS warning light 5 flashes in the instrument cluster The TCS should normally always be enabled Only in certain exceptional cir cumstances can it be sensible to switch the system off for instance gt when driving with snow chains gt when driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface gt when it is necessary to rock a vehicle free whe
66. streets 113 D Subject to fulfilment of the national legal requirements General information Pay attention to low slung parts of the vehicle such as the spoiler and ex haust particularly in the following situations gt When driving on poorly maintained roads and tracks gt When driving over kerb stones gt When driving on steep ramps etc Particular attention is necessary for vehicle with a sports suspension and when then vehicle is fully laden Driving through water on streets Fig 111 Driving through water The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided when driving through water e g flooded roads gt Determine the depth of the water before driving through it The water level must not reach above the web of the lower sill Fig 111 gt Do not drive any faster than at a walking speed At a higher speed a water wave can form in front of the vehicle which can cause water to penetrate into the engine s air intake system or other parts of the vehicle gt Never stop in the water do not reverse and do not switch the engine off Starting off and Driving 113 E WARNING a Driving through water mud sludge etc can reduce the braking power and extend the braking distance there is the risk of an accident a Avoid abrupt and sudden braking immediately after water crossings After driving through bodies of water the brakes must be cleaned and dried as soon as po
67. system The functionality of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off Airbag was switched off using diagnostic equipment gt The 2 warning light lights up for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes again for approximately 12 seconds Front passenger airbag switched off with the key switch in the storage com partment gt The 2 warning light comes on for about 3 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt The OFF 2 3 Fig 12 on page 18 warning light comes on when the ignition is switched on Note The national regulations for switching off airbags must be observed A KODA Service Partner will be able to inform you which airbags in your ve hicle can must be deactivated 1 The OFF airbag warning light comes on for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on goes out for about 1 second and then comes on again 18 Safety Switching off the front passenger airbag AIRBAG PASSENGER AIR BAG B5J 0598 Fig 12 Key operated switch for the front passenger airbag warning light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation Only the front passenger airbag is deactivated with the key switch Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the passenger door gt Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key H gt Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop
68. the cap 1 Fig 122 from the lock on the tow bar in the direction of the arrow gt Unlock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key 180 to the left so that the red marking 2 becomes visible gt Grasp the ball head from underneath gt Press the release pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the direc tion of the arrow The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand If it does not fall freely into the hand use your other hand to push it upwards At the same time the ball head latches into the ready position and is thus ready to be re inserted into the mounting recess gt Fit the cover for the mounting recess 4 Fig 117 on page 122 in the oppo site direction to the arrow 124 Driving gt Offer up the cap to the rear bumper 2 Fig 117 on page 122 aligning it with check mark in the lower bumper area gt Push the cap in first on the left and right and then at the top E WARNING Never allow the ball head to remain unsecured in the boot This could cause damage in a sudden braking manoeuvre and put the safety of the oc cupants at risk EE CAUTION a If the lever is held firm and not pushed downwards as far as it can go it will go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the ready po sition The ball head then needs to be brought into this position
69. the proper use of the safety belts Never use a Seatbelt to secure two persons not even children Nor may the seat belt be placed over a child who is sitting on the lap of another pas senger E WARNING Continued The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct one for your seat Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to protect and the risk of injury increases The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked otherwise the belt tongue will not lock in place properly s Many layers of clothing and loose clothing e g a winter coat over a jack et do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of the seat belts a It is prohibited to use clamps or other objects to adjust seat belts e g for shortening the belts for smaller persons The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when the seat backrests are correctly locked into position page 67 H WARNING Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts The belt webbing must always be kept clean Soiled belts may impair proper operation of the inertia reel page 135 Seat belts a The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way Do not at tempt to repair the seat belts yourself a Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage to the seat belts seat belt connections inertia reel or the lock is detected the seat belt concern
70. the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle at washing bays intended for this purpose Washing by hand A Read and observe H and on page 129 first Soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse as much as you can of this off Clean the vehicle with a soft sponge a washing glove or a washing brush Work from the top to the bottom starting with the roof Only use a car shampoo for stubborn dirt Wash out the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals Clean wheels door sills and similar parts last Use a second sponge for such areas Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois leather TE CAUTION When washing the car by hand protect your hands and arms from sharp edged metal parts e g when cleaning the underfloor the inside of the wheel housings or the wheel trims etc there is a risk of cuts Only apply slight pressure when cleaning the vehicle s paintwork Carcare 129 Automatic car wash systems A Read and observe H and on page 129 first The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system e g closing the windows including the slid ing tilting roof etc If your vehicle is fitted with any particular mounted parts such as a spoiler roof rack two way radio aerial it is best to consult the operator of the car wash system beforehand The lips of the windscreen wiper rubbers must be cleaned an
71. the steering angle E WARNING If the halogen projector headlights with cornering light function are faulty the headlights are automatically lowered to the emergency position which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming traffic Thus the illuminated length of the road is shortened Drive carefully and visit a specialist garage as soon as possible Fog lights Fig 43 Dash panel Light switch E4 B5J 0267 N Read and observe H on page 56 first Switching on off gt First turn the light switch Fig 43 to position 2 or 20 gt Pull the light switch to position 1 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the fog lights are switched on page 35 Foglights with the CORNER function N Read and observe H on page 56 first The CORNER function lights the front fog lamp on the relevant side of the ve hicle to illuminate the area around the vehicle when turning parking etc The CORNER function is switched on automatically if the following conditions are met gt The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are turned sharply to the right or left gt The engine is running gt The vehicle is stopped or is travelling at a speed of no more than 40 km h gt The low beam is switched on gt The daytime running lights are not switched on gt The fog lights are not switched on gt Reverse gear is not engaged Re
72. the vehicle key Switching on gt On vehicles without central locking turn the slot of the lock in the left hand door anti clockwise Fig 27 A and clockwise in the right hand door gt On vehicles with central locking turn the slot of the lock in the left hand door clockwise Fig 27 B and anti clockwise on the right hand door Switching off gt On vehicles without central locking turn the slot of the lock on the left hand door clockwise and anti clockwise on the right hand door gt On vehicles with central locking turn the slot of the lock on the left hand door anti clockwise and clockwise on the right hand door 44 Using the system Opening closing the door B5J 0585 Fig 28 Door handle door opening lever Opening from the outside gt Unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle A Fig 28 on the door you wish to open Opening from the inside gt Pull on door handle B of the door and push the door away from you Closing from the inside gt Grab the pull handle C and close the door E WARNING Make sure that the door has closed correctly as it can open suddenly while the vehicle is being driven there is a risk of death Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening closing sweep there is a risk of injury An opened door can close spontaneously if there is a strong wind or the vehicle is on a slope there is a risk of injury Never drive with the doors
73. through the tensioning clasps on both sides in turn gt If necessary you can correct the position of the bicycles in the vehicle CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Attachment points 78 Roof load 78 gt Seats and storage 77 E WARNING The items being transported on the roof rack must be reliably attached there is the risk of an accident a Always secure the load with appropriate and undamaged lashing straps or tensioning straps Distribute the load evenly over the roof rack system a The handling properties of your vehicle change when you transport heavy or bulky items on the roof rack system as a result of the centre of gravity being shifted and the greater area exposed to the wind there is the risk of an accident The style of driving and speed must therefore be adapted to the current circumstances Avoid abrupt and sudden driving braking manoeuvres a Adjust the speed and driving style to the visibility weather road and traf fic conditions The permissible roof load permissible axle loads and gross permissible weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances there is the risk of an accident EE CAUTION Only roof racks from the KODA Original Accessories range should be used a The fitting instructions supplied with the roof luggage rack system must be observed when handling roof racks On models fitted with a power sliding tilting
74. tyres Tyre damage Drive over kerbs and other such obstacles slowly and at right angles wherever possible in order to avoid damage to tyres and wheel trims We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage punctures cuts splits and bulges etc on a regular basis Remove foreign bodies e g small stones from the tyre profile immediately Swapping wheels around If significantly greater wear is present on the front tyres we recommend swapping the front wheels with the rear wheels as shown in the dia gram Fig 134 You will then obtain approximately the same life for all the tyres We recommend that you swap the tyres around every 10 000 km in order to achieve even wear on all tyres and to obtain optimal tyre life Storing tyres Mark the tyres as you remove them so that you are able to refit them to run in the same direction Always store wheels or tyres in a cool dry and where possible dark place Tyres which are not fixed to a wheel trim should be stored upright Wear indicators The base of the tread of the tyres has 1 6 mm high wear indicators installed These wear indicators are arranged evenly spaced around the circumference of the tyre a number of times depending on the make Fig 133 A Markings on the walls of the tyres through the letters TWI triangular symbols or other symbols identify the position of the wear indicators Tyre age Tyres age losing their original characteristics even
75. watt Never exceed the maximum power consumption otherwise the vehicle s electrical system can be damaged Connecting electrical components when the engine is not running will drain the battery of the vehicle there is a risk of the battery discharging Only use matching plugs to avoid damaging the power socket Only use accessories that have been tested for electromagnetic compatibility in accordance with the applicable directives Switch off the devices connected to the power sockets before you switch the ignition on or off and before starting the engine to avoid damage from voltage fluctuations Observe the operating instructions for the connected devices Clothes hook A Read and observe H on page 79 first The clothes hooks are located on the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors H WARNING Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision to the rear Only use the hooks for hanging light items of clothing and ensure that there are no heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets Do not use clothes hangers for hanging up items of clothing otherwise this may reduce the effectiveness of head airbags AE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hooks is 2 kg Car park ticket holder Fig 82 Windscreen Parking ticket hold er A Read and observe H on page 79 first The note holder is designed e g for attaching car park tickets E WARNING The attached n
76. when towing a trailer CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Storing a speed 118 Changing a stored speed 118 Switching off temporarily 119 Switching off completely 119 The cruise control system CCS maintains a constant speed above 25 km h once it has been set without you having to depress the accelerator pedal This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output and braking power of the engine The warning light in the instrument cluster lights up when the cruise con trol system is switched on WARNING For safety reasons the cruise control system must not be used in dense traffic or on unfavourable road surfaces such as icy roads slippery roads loose gravel there is a risk of an accident The saved speed may only be resumed if it is not too high for the current traffic conditions Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys tem being enabled unintentionally EE CAUTION The cruise control system is not able to maintain a constant speed when driving in areas with steeper gradients The weight of the vehicle increases the speed at which it travels Therefore shift to a lower gear in good time or slow the vehicle down by applying the foot brake It is not possible to switch on the cruise control system on vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox if first gear or reverse gear is engaged 118 Driving
77. window operational faults page 53 Enter the radio navigation system code number User manual of the radio or user manual of the naviga tion system page 28 Setting the clock Data in the multifunction display are de leted page 29 Note We recommend having the vehicle checked by a specialist garage to ensure the full functionality of all electrical systems Inspecting and replenishing 149 Automatic load deactivation A Read and observe H and on page 147 first The vehicle voltage control unit automatically prevents the battery from dis charging when the battery is subjected to heavy loads This may be noticed from the following gt The idling speed is raised to allow the generator to deliver more electricity to the electrical system gt Where appropriate large convenience consumers e g seat heaters rear win dow heaters have their power limited or shut off completely if necessary TE CAUTION Despite such intervention by the vehicle electric system management the vehicle battery may be drained For example when the ignition is switched on a long time with the engine turned off or the side or parking lights are turned on during longer parking Consumers which are supplied via a 12 V socket can cause the vehicle battery to discharge when the ignition is switched off EF Note Driving comfort is not disrupted by any shutting off of consumers Often the driver is not
78. yourself proceed as follows gt Flip out the key gt Press off the battery cover with your thumb or using a flat screwdriver in the region of arrows 1 Fig 26 gt Remove the discharged battery from the key by pressing the battery down wards in the region of arrow 2 gt Insert the new battery Ensure that the symbol on the battery is facing upwards The correct polarity is shown on the battery cover gt Place the battery cover on the key and press it down until it clicks into place EE CAUTION a Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery The replacement battery must have the same specification as the original battery For the sake of the environment Dispose of the used battery in accordance with national legal provisions Unlocking and locking 43 Note The system has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the remote control key after replacing the battery page 49 Replacing the battery in the key a glued decorative cover requires the cover to be destroyed A replacement cover can be purchased from a SKODA Partner Child safety lock B5J 0488 Fig 27 Switching child safety lock on for vehicles without or with central locking system The child safety lock prevents the corresponding rear door from being opened from the inside The door can only be opened from the outside You can switch the child safety lock on and off using
79. 00 free memory locations Each contact can contain up to 4 numbers If the number of contacts loaded exceeds 2 500 the phone book is not com plete Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Fig 98 Multifunction steering wheel Mobile phone operation BNH 0003 Button ad justment wheel Fig 98 Action There are buttons in the steering wheel for easy operation of the basic func tions of the phone Fig 98 so that the driver is distracted from the traffic as little as possible when using the phone This applies only if your vehicle has been equipped with the universal tele phone preinstallation hands free system at the factory If the side lights are switched on the buttons and the symbols 4 and on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated Operation Press briefly Accept call terminate call entry in the main menu of the telephone list of selected numbers Press button for a long period of time Reject call last number dialled switch voice control on off Press briefly Switch on off voice control Turn upwards Increase the volume Turn downwards a Valid for vehicles with the Amundsent navigation system b Valid for vehicles without the Amundsen navigation system Inserting the mobile phone and adapter Fig 99 Universal telephone preinstalla tion Only one telephone mount is factory fitted An adapter for the mobile phone can be purchased
80. Applies to cars fitted with the 1 2 1 77 kW TSI and 1 6 I 77 kW TDI CR engines and 15 wheels 4 Applies to cars fitted with the 1 6 I 77 kW MPI 1 6 1 55 kW TDI CR and 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR engines and 14 wheels Technical data 177 Vehicle specific details according to engine type The values specified have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles 1 2 Itr 44 kW engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 44 5200 108 3000 3 1198 Performance and Weights FABIA ESTATE Top speed km h 155 156 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 16 5 16 7 Operating weight in kg 1095 1115 Permissible trailer load braked kg 8002 900 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 540 5009 550 450 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 1 2 Itr 51 kW engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 51 5400 112 3000 3 1198 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 163 164 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 9 15 0 Operating weight in kg 1095 1115 Permissible trailer load braked kg 8007 900 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 540 5009 550 450 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 178 Technical d
81. Child seat D WARNING Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Ensure that there are no excessive forces such as violent knocks kicks etc impact on the backrests of the seats otherwise the system may be damaged The side airbags would not be deployed in such a case a Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by SKODA In view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat use of non approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro tective function of the side airbag Any damage to the original seat covers in the area of the side airbag mod ule must be repaired without delay by your specialist garage The airbag modules in the front seats must not display any damage cracks or deep scratches It is not permissible to use force in order to open the modules Head airbags Fig 11 Location of the head airbag gas filled head airbag In the event of a severe side collision the head airbag system offers additional protection for the head and neck area of passengers The head airbags are positioned above the doors on both sides in the interior of the car Fig 11 A In the event of a side collision the head airbag is deployed together with the relevant side air
82. Depress the accelerator pedal slowly However do not depress it as far as the kickdown position page 108 gt An economic driving programme is automatically selected if the accelerator pedal is only depressed slowly Avoiding full throttle 1 100 km Fig 109 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km and speed in km h km h 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 N Read and observe M on page 110 first The slower you drive the more the fuel savings Sensitive use of the accelerator will not only significantly reduce fuel con sumption but also positively influence environmental pollution and wear of your vehicle The maximum speed of your vehicle should as far possible never be used Fuel consumption pollutant emissions and vehicle noises increase dispropor tionally at high speeds The graph Fig 109 shows the ratio of fuel consumption to the speed of your vehicle Fuel consumption will be halved if you drive at only three quarters of the possible top speed of your vehicle Reducing idling AN Read and observe M on page 110 first Idling also costs fuel In vehicles not equipped with the START STOP system turn off the engine when in a traffic jam at a level crossing or traffic lights with longer wait times Even after just 30 40 seconds you will have saved more fuel than that is nee ded when you start the engine up again If an engine is only idling it takes much longer for it to reach it
83. Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle a The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat b If the front passenger seat is fitted with the ISOFIX system attachment points it is suited for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi Universal approval IL SU The seat is suited for installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the Semi E WARNING Continued Universal approval The Semi Universal category means that the ISO Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye FIX child seat is approved for your vehicle Observe the information in On no account should you equip your vehicle e g mount screws or other the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat anchorage points IUF The seat is suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX child seat with the approval Universal and attachment with the TOP TETHER belt X The seat is not fitted with ISOFIX system attachment points TOP TETHER system attachment points Fig 17 Anchor eyelets on the TOP TETHER system The anchor eyelets for attaching the belt for a child seat with the TOP TETHER system are located on the rear side of the outer rear seat backrests Fig 17 U WARNING Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the TOP TETHER system Only use child seats with the TOP TETHER system on the
84. Inertia reel and belt pretensioners Airbag system Description of the airbag system Airbag overview Deactivating airbags Transporting children safely Child seat Fastening systems Using the system Cockpit Overview Instruments and Indicator Lights Instrument cluster Multifunction display MFD Service Interval Display MAXI DOT display Warning lights Unlocking and locking Unlocking and locking Central locking system Remote control Anti theft alarm system Tailgate 10 10 13 14 14 17 19 19 22 25 24 26 26 eo 32 33 35 42 42 45 U A D o0 Electrical power windows Electric sliding tilting roof Lights and visibility Lights Interior lights Visibility Windscreen wipers and washers Rear window Seats and storage Front seats Rear seats Head restraints Boot Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Fabia Estate Net partition Fabia Estate Bicycle carrier in the luggage compartment __ Roof rack system Useful equipment Storage compartments Heating and air conditioning Heating ventilation cooling Heating Air conditioning system manual air conditioning system Climatronic automatic air conditioning system Communication and multimedia Universal telephone preinstallation GSM II __
85. Q Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Level check 146 Changing 146 E WARNING The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 139 Do not continue your journey if the fluid level has fallen below the MIN marking Fig 130 on page 146 there is a risk of an accident Seek help from a specialist garage Do not use used brake fluid the function of the brake system may be im paired there is the risk of an accident CAUTION Brake fluid damages the paintwork of the vehicle F Note The brake fluid is changed as part of a prescribed inspection service We recommend using oils from the SKODA Original Accessories range Level check Fig 130 Engine compartment Brake fluid reservoir 146 General Maintenance A Read and observe H and on page 146 first The brake fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Fig 130 gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir Fig 130 The level must be between the MIN and MAX markings A slight drop in the fluid level results in operation due to normal wear and tear and the automatic adjustment of the brake pads There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system however if the fluid level drops significantly within a short ti
86. SIMPLY CLEVER SKODA Fabia Owner s Manual This Owner s Manual has been systematically designed to make it easy for you to search for and obtain the information you require Chapters table of contents and subject index The text of the Owner s manual is divided into relatively short sections which are combined into easy to read chapters The chapter you are reading at any particular moment is always specified on the bottom right of the page The Table of contents is arranged according to the chapters and the detailed Subject index at the end of the Owner s Manual helps you to rapidly find the information you are looking for Direction indications All direction indications such as left right front rear relate to the direction of travel of the vehicle Units of measurement All values are expressed in metric units Explanation of symbols a Denotes a reference to a section with important information and safety advice in a chapter Denotes the end of a section Denotes the continuation of a section on the next page Indicates situations where the vehicle must be stopped as soon as possible Denotes a registered trademark Denotes the display in the MAXI DOT display Denotes the display in the segment display Ov E Display The display in the segment display will be used in this Owner s Manual to repre sent the display unless otherwise specified 5J 6012720AG Notes U WARNING
87. The lever will stay in position after releasing it 6 Headlight cleaning system N Read and observe H and H on page 62 first The headlights are sprayed briefly if the low beam or main beam are switched on and the windscreen wiper stalk is pulled to position 5 Fig 50 on page 63 To clean the headlights the windshield is also sprayed after every five squirts You should remove stubborn dirt such as insect residues from the headlight lenses at regular intervals for example when refuelling The following guide lines must be observed page 132 Headlight lenses Lights and visibility 63 To ensure the proper operation of the cleaning system during the winter any snow should be removed from the washer nozzle fixtures and ice should be cleared with a de icing spray CAUTION Never remove the nozzles from the headlight cleaning system by hand there is risk of damage Replacing the windscreen wiper blades Fig 51 Windscreen wiper blade CQ Read and observe H and on page 62 first Removing the wiper blade gt Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from the windscreen gt Press the locking button 1 Fig 51 and remove the wiper blade in the direc tion of arrow 2 Fitting the wiper blade gt Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arms back to the windscreen Windshield wiper blades in proper condition are
88. _ Voice control Multimedia Driving Starting off and Driving Starting and stopping the engine Brakes 5 54 56 56 60 61 62 64 66 66 67 68 69 73 74 76 Tf 78 81 85 85 87 88 91 aa 93 98 99 102 102 103 Manual gear shifting and pedals Automatic transmission Running in Economical driving and respect the environment Avoiding damage to your vehicle Driving abroad Assist systems Brake assist systems Parking aid Cruise control system START STOP Towing a trailer Towing device Trailer General Maintenance Car care Services modifications and technical alterations Washing the car Vehicle exterior care Care of the interior Inspecting and replenishing Fuel Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Brake fluid Vehicle battery Wheels Tyres and rims Winter use Table of Contents 105 106 109 T10 113 114 M5 i 117 118 T19 121 121 125 127 127 129 130 133 136 136 139 142 144 146 146 150 150 156 Emergency equipment and self help 157 Emergency equipment 157 Changing a wheel 158 Tyre repair 161 Jump starting 163 Towing the vehicle 165 Fuses and light bulbs 167 Fuses 167 Bulbs 169 Technical data 175 Vehicle data 175 4 Table of Contents CO in g km discha
89. a risk of injury Expectant women must also always wear a Seat belt This is the only way of ensuring optimal protection for the unborn child page 12 Fastening and unfastening seat belts The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if you are correctly seated page 7 Correct and safe seated position a The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness H WARNING Information on the correct routing of the belt Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in minor accidents Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder on no ac count across your neck a A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then suddenly held firm by the belt The belt must not run across solid or fragile objects e g spectacles ball point pens keys etc Such objects can cause injury E WARNING Information on dealing with the safety belts The belt webbing must not be jammed in between at any point or twis ted or chafe against any sharp edges Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it HU WARNING Information on
90. a speed of at least 60 km h with engine revolutions of between 1 800 2 000 per mi nute The warning light only goes out once the diesel particulate filter has been successfully cleaned If the filter is not properly cleaned the warning light does not go out and the warning light ov begins to flash The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Diesel particulate filter Log book The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode After switching the ignition off and on again the indicator light the indicator light also lights up Seek help from a specialist garage E WARNING The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures there is a fire hazard and serious injury could be caused Therefore never stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with flammable materials such as dry grass undergrowth leaves spilled fuel or such like a Always adjust your speed to suit weather road region and traffic condi tions The recommendations indicated by the warning light must not tempt you to disregard the national regulations for road traffic EE CAUTION As long as the warning light lights up one must take into account an in creased fuel consumption and in certain circumstances a power reduction of the engine 40 Using the system Note We recommend avoiding regularly driving short distances to assist the com bustion proces
91. able rules of safety as well as the warning instructions outlined below Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde pendent especially children a Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the battery vent openings Protect your eyes by wearing safety glasses or a face shield there is a risk of being blinded a Always wear protective gloves eye and skin protection when handling the vehicle battery a The battery acid is strongly corrosive and must therefore be handled with the greatest of care Corrosive fumes in the air irritate the air passages and lead to conjunctivi tis and inflammation of the air passages in the lungs Battery acid corrodes dental enamel and creates deep wounds on contact with the skin which take a long time to heal Repeated contact with diluted acids causes skin diseases inflammations ulcers slin cracks E WARNING Continued a f any battery electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes rinse the eyes immediately with clear water for several minutes consult a doctor immediately Splashes of acid on your skin or clothes should be neutralised as soon as possible using soap suds and then rinsed with plenty of water Seek imme diate medical assistance if you swallow battery acid E WARNING a It is prohibited to work with a naked flame and light Smoking or any activities which produce sparks are prohibited a Never use a damaged v
92. abroad 114 Unleaded petrol 114 ABS 116 warning light 38 Accessories 127 Adjusting Belt height 13 Exterior mirrors 65 Head restraints 69 Steering wheel 8 Adjusting the seats 7 Adjustment Headlight beam 57 Seats 66 Adjustments and technical changes Spoiler 128 Adjustments and technical modifications Airbags 128 Aerial 130 See windows 132 Airbag 14 Adjustments and impairment of the airbag sys tem 128 Deactivating 18 Deployment 14 Front airbag 15 Head airbag 17 Side airbag 16 Switching off the front passenger airbag 18 Airbag system 14 Air conditioning Operation 89 184 Index Air conditioning system Air outlets 86 Climatronic 91 Manual air conditioning system 88 Air outlets 86 Alarm 49 Anti theft alarm system 49 Operation 49 Trailer 126 Antilock Braking System 116 Armrest 84 Ashtray 79 ASR 116 warning light 38 Assist systems ABS 38 116 ASR 38 116 Cruise control system 118 EDS and XDS 116 ESC 38 115 Parking aid 117 START STOP 119 Auto Check Control 34 Automatic gearbox Selector lever emergency unlocking 109 Starting off and driving 108 Tiptronic 107 Automatic load deactivation 150 Automatic transmission 106 Kickdown 108 Malfunction 108 Selector lever lock 107 Using the selector lever 106 AUX 101 Avoiding damage to the vehicle Driving through water 113 Avoiding damage to your vehicle 113
93. achieve maximum acceleration by your vehicle while driving When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed the kickdown function is activa ted in any forward driving mode 108 Driving The gearbox shifts down one or more gears depending on the vehicle speed and engine speed and the vehicle accelerates The gearbox does not shift up into the highest gear until the engine has reached its maximum revolutions for this gear range U WARNING Rapid acceleration particularly on slippery roads can lead to loss of control of the vehicle there is a risk of an accident Malfunction A Read and observe H and on page 106 first Emergency programme The transmission switches to the emergency programme if there is a fault in the automatic gearbox system Indications of an activated emergency programme include the following gt Only certain gears are selected gt Reverse gear R cannot be used gt Shifting gears in Tiptronic mode is not possible Gearbox overheating The gearbox may for example become too hot due to frequent repeated Starting or stop and go traffic Overheating is indicated by the warning light page 34 lt i Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot Note Visit a specialist workshop if the gearbox has switched to the emergency pro gramme Selector lever emergency unlocking Fig 107 Selector lever emergency un locking a A Read and observe H and H on page 106 first If the sele
94. ack slightly first on one side and then on the other and remove it from the mounts C Fig 70 gt Hold the transverse rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged If you wish to use the entire boot the foldable boot cover can be re moved page 72 Using the net partition behind the front seats ine comme Il sm Fig 71 Extending retracting the net partition A Read and observe H on page 74 first Extending gt Open the rear right door gt Fold the seat cushions and rear seat rests forward gt Pull the net partition by tab A Fig 71 out of the housing B in the direction of mounts C gt Insert the transverse rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle in the same way Retracting gt Pull the transverse rod back slightly first on one side and then on the other and remove it from the mounts C Fig 71 gt Hold the transverse rod in such a way that the net partition can slowly roll up into the housing B without being damaged gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position Removing and refitting the net partition housing Fig 72 Rear seats Net partition housing A Read and observe H on page 74 first Removing gt Open the rear right door gt Fold the seat cushions and rear seat backrests forward first the lef
95. ack to you a voice entry for the contact can be updated or deleted etc Lists of dialled numbers missed calls etc CALL XYZ PHONE BOOK CALL REGISTER After this command a telephone number can be entered to establish a connection with the reques ted party After this command the system calls the last dial led number Play music from the mobile phone or another paired device DIAL NUMBER REDIAL MUSIC After this command the system offers additional context dependent commands FURTHER OPTIONS SETTINGS Selection for setting Bluetooth dialogue etc CANCEL The dialogue is ended a On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system If a voice command is not detected the system answers with Sorry anda new attempt can be made After the 2nd error the system repeats the aid Af ter the 3rd failed attempt the answer Cancelled is given and the dialogue is ended After this command the system repeats all possible Store voice recording of a contact If automatic name recognition does not work reliably for some contacts you can choose to save your own voice tag for the contact in the Phone book Voice tag Record menu item Your own voice tag can also be saved using the voice control in the FURTHER OPTIONS menu CO Introduc
96. active gt Has the mobile phone already been paired with the hands free system Note a f a suitable adapter is available for your mobile phone only use your mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount so that the radiation in the vehicle drops to a minimum a Placing the mobile phone in the adapter inserted in the telephone mount en sures optimum sending and receiving power Symbols in the MAXI DOT display Charge status of the telephone battery nnil Signal strength a phone is connected to the hands free system 1 Some mobile phones have a menu in which the authorisation for establishing a Bluetooth connection is completed by inputting a code If the authorisation input is required it must always be performed when re establishing the Bluetooth connection On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsen navigation system This function is not available in vehicles fitted with the Amundsent navigation system 2 Ww The hands free system is visible to other devices A multimedia unit is connected to the hands free system a This function is only supported by some mobile phones Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display The following menu items can be selected from the Phone menu Phone book Dial number Call lists Voice mailbox
97. ad and observe H and on page 121 first The ball head can be removed and is kept in the spare wheel well or in a com partment for the spare wheel in the luggage compartment page 158 Vehicle tool kit Image description Fig 117 and Fig 118 Tool for removing the wheel trims Cover in the rear bumper 13 pin power socket Cover for the mounting recess Dust cap Ball head Operating lever Lock cap o gt fo he 122 Driving 9 Release pin Key m Locking ball FF Note The tool for removing the wheel trim is part of the vehicle tool kit page 158 If you lose the key please get in touch with a specialist garage Adjusting the ready position Fig 119 Setting the ready position ready position A Read and observe H and H on page 121 first Always adjust the ball head in the ready position before fitting gt Turn the key so that its red mark 1 Fig 119 is visible gt Grip the ball head below the protective cap 2 gt Press the release pin 3 as far as the stop in the direction of the arrow at the same time push the lever 4 downwards as far as it will go in the direc tion of the arrow The lever remains locked in this position EF CAUTION In the ready position the key cannot be removed nor turned to a different po sition Fitting the ball head B5J 0581 Fig 120 Insert the ball head lock the lock and put the lock cover on A Read and observe H and F on page 121
98. ading 125 Towing a trailer les Transport Boot 69 Roof rack system 77 Transporting children safely 19 Turn signals 58 Two way radio systems 93 Index 189 Tyre load bearing capacity see Wheels Tyre pressure monitor Setting Tyre repair Check pressure Preparations Sealing and inflating the tyre Tyres New Pressure See Wheels Sizes Wear indicator U Underbody protection Underbody waxing Unleaded petrol unlock 153 154 163 162 163 150 153 152 153 152 152 133 133 114 47 Central locking system Unlocking Remote control without central locking Unlocking and locking USB Useful equipment 12 volt power outlet Ashtray Car park ticket holder Cigarette lighter Clothes hood Cupholders Using the selector lever V Variable loading floor Dividing the luggage compartment Removing and refitting 190 Index Vehicle battery Automatic load deactivation Charging Checking the battery electrolyte level Cover Disconnecting and reconnecting Operation in winter Replacing Safety instructions Vehicle care Alcantara Care of the interior Decorative films Fabrics Polishing Rubber seals Seat covers Synthetic leather Underbody waxing Vehicle exterior care Waxing Vehicle data sticker Ve
99. aid is not a substitute for the driver paying proper attention and it is always the driver s responsibility to take care when reversing the vehicle or carrying out similar manoeuvres Pay particular attention to small children and animals as they are not recognised by the parking aid sensors Before reversing you should make sure that there are no small obstacles such as rocks thin posts trailer drawbars etc behind your vehicle Such ob stacles may not be recognised by the parking aid sensors Under certain circumstances surfaces of certain objects and types of clothing cannot reflect the system signals Thus these objects or people who wear such clothing are not recognised by the System sensors a External sound sources can have a detrimental effect on the system Un der adverse conditions this may cause objects or people to not be recog nised by the system EE CAUTION a f a warning signal sounds for about 3 seconds after activating the system and there is no obstacle close to your car this indicates a system fault Have the fault rectified by a specialist garage The sensors must be kept clean free of ice etc to enable the parking aid to operate properly Under adverse weather conditions heavy rain water vapour very low or high temperatures etc system function may be limited a Additionally fitted modules such as a bicycle rack can impair the function of the parking aid Function Fig 113 Parking aid
100. airbag The airbag can be triggered unexpectedly in an accident it may result in injury or death CAUTION An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat 20 Child safety and side airbag 21 Classification of child seats 21 Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt 21 Children are generally safer on the rear seats than on the front passenger seat In contrast to adults the muscles and bone structure of children are not yet fully developed Thus children are exposed to increased risk of injury Children should be transported in accordance with the relevant statutory pro visions Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard must be used The ECE R standard stands for Economic Commission for Europe Regulation Child seats that comply with the ECE R 44 standard have a test seal that can not be removed a large E within a circle with the test number below H WARNING The national legal requirements must be observed when using child seats One should never carry children and also not babies on one s lap a Never leave children unattended in the vehicle Certain outside climatic conditions can cause life threatening temperatures in the vehicle a The child must be secured in the vehicle throughout the journey Other wise in the event of an ac
101. an be reached with your arms at a slight angle vV Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance A between the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm Fig 1 Adjusting the steering wheel page 8 Adjusting the steering wheel position v Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head B Y Correctly fasten the seat belt page 10 Wearing seat belts Setting the seats and head restraints page 66 Passive Safety 7 WARNING Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not change this position while driving Also advise your passengers to adopt the correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving a Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and a dis tance of at least 10 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of the knee airbag Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard When driving hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out er edge in the 9 o clock and 3 o clock position Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o clock position or in any other way e g in the middle or inner edge of the steering wheel In such cases you could severely injure your arms hands and head when the driver airbag is deployed a Ensure that there are no objects in th
102. ance There is no power assisted steering support when the vehicle is being towed without the engine running or when the power assisted steering is defect The vehicle is fully steerable however There is however increased force re quired to turn the steering wheel 2 Electronic Stability Control ESC N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light flashes to show that the ESC is currently operating If the warning light comes on immediately after you start the engine the ESC might be switched off due to technical reasons Switch the ignition off and on again The ESC is fully functional again if the 53 warning light does not light up after you switch the engine back on There is a fault in the ESC system if the 2 warning light lights up The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display O Error Electronic Stability Control ESC Seek help from a specialist garage The ESC system cannot be turned off the page 116 button only switches the TCS off the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up 38 Using the system As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS the ESP indicator light will also come on if the ABS system fails Further information page 115 Stabilisation control ESC Note The amp warning light comes on after the ignition is switched on if the vehicle s battery has been disconnected and reconnected The warning light should go out after the vehicle has driven a short
103. ands free system whereby only one mobile phone can communicate with the hands free system The visibility of the hands free system is automatically switched off 3 minutes after the ignition is switched on and is also deactivated when the mobile phone has connected to the hands free system Restoring the visibility of the hands free system If you have not managed to connect your mobile phone with the hands free system within 3 minutes of switching on the ignition the visibility of the hands free system can be reestablished for 3 minutes in the following ways gt By turning the ignition off and on gt By turning voice control off and on gt In the Bluetooth Visibility menu in the MAXI DOT display Creating a connection with an already paired mobile phone After switching on the ignition the connection is automatically established for the already paired mobile phone Check on your mobile phone if the automat ic connection has been established Disconnecting the connection gt By withdrawing the ignition key gt By disconnecting the hands free system in the mobile phone gt By disconnecting the user in the Bluetooth Users menu item in the MAXI DOT display Solving connection problems Check the operating status of the mobile phone if the system reports No paired phone found gt Is the mobile phone switched on gt Is the PIN code entered gt Is Bluetooth active gt Is the visibility of the mobile phone
104. ar fog light N Read and observe H on page 56 first Switching on off gt First turn the light switch Fig 43 on page 58 to position or 20 gt Pull the light switch to position 2 The rear fog light is switched off in the reverse sequence If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights page 58 the rear fog light is switch ed on by turning the light switch to the position or 20 and is pulled out di rectly to the position 2 This switch can only be pulled into one position The warning light 0 lights up in the instrument cluster when the rear fog light is switched on page 35 Only the rear fog light on the trailer lights up if the vehicle has a factory fitted towing device or a towing device from SKODA original accessories and it is driven with a trailer 1 If both switch on versions are conflicting for example if the steering wheel is turned to the left and the right turn signal light is switched on the turn signal light has the higher priority Tourist lights N Read and observe H on page 56 first Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function This mode makes it possible to drive in countries with opposing traffic system driving on the left right without dazzling the oncoming vehicles When the mode tourist light is active the side to side swivel of the headlights is deacti vated Activating tourist light Before activating the tourist light the following conditions must be met I
105. arrow Fig 150 gt After the fuse has been replaced replace the cover in the dash panel in the opposite direction of the arrow so that the guide lugs are guided into the openings of the dash panel Close the cover until it clicks into place Fuses and light bulbs 167 Fuse assignment in the dash panel Power consumer Telephone preinstallation Petrol engine AKF valve Diesel engine Control flap Injection coolant pump Fuel pump ignition Cruise control system operation of PTC relay Lambda probe High pressure fuel pump pressure valve Engine control unit Engine control unit vacuum pump Daytime running lights radio for vehicles with START STOP Main beam Rear fog light DC DC converter START STOP Fog lights Air blower for heating Not assigned Rear window heater Horn Windscreen wipers Central control unit for convenience system Engine control unit fuel pump Cigarette lighter power socket in the luggage compartment ABS START STOP DC DC converter ESP Turn signal lights brake lights START STOP DC DC transformer radio Electrical power window front and rear left side Electrical power window front and rear right side Parking light left side electrical sliding tilting roof START STOP instrument cluster alarm Control un
106. asons park the vehicle at a safe dis tance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warn ing light system page 60 Carefully open the coolant expansion bottle If the engine is hot the cool ing system is pressurized risk of scalding It is therefore best to allow the engine to cool down before removing the cap Do not touch the radiator fan The radiator fan may switch itself on auto matically even if the ignition is off EE CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating Instruments and Indicator Lights 37 Power steering A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on If the warning light after switching on the ignition or when driving lights up continuously a fault exists in the electrohydraulic power steering The power steering operates with reduced steering assist or does not function at all Seek help from a specialist garage Note a If the yellow warning light goes out after the engine is restarted anda short drive it is not necessary to visit a specialist garage a If the vehicle battery has been disconnected and reconnected the yellow warning light comes on after switching on the ignition The warning light should go out after driving a short dist
107. ata 1 2 Itr 63 kW TSI engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 63 4800 160 1500 3500 4 1197 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 177 178 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 11 7 11 8 Operating weight in kg 1116 1136 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1100 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 1 2 Itr 77 kW TSI engine 550 500 560 450 Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 77 5000 175 1500 4100 4 1197 Performance and Weights FABIA MG5 FABIA DSG7 COMBI MG5 COMBI DSG7 Top speed km h 191 189 193 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 3 Operating weight in kg 1130 1164 1150 1184 Permissible trailer load braked kg 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg a Vehicles without ABS 560 5007 580 500 570 450 590 450 Technical data 179 1 4 Itr 63 kW engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 63 5000 132 3800 4 1390 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 175 176 Acceleration 0 100 km h s lez 12 3 Operating weight in kg 1104 1124 Permissible trailer load braked kg 10002 1200 Permissible trailer load unbrake
108. ation material e g with a blanket there is a risk of fire The bonnet must always be properly closed when driving This is why af ter closing the bonnet the lock must always be checked to ensure it has engaged properly If you notice that the lock is not properly engaged while driving stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet there is the risk of an accident EE CAUTION Always top up using the correct specification of fluids This may result in major operating problems and also vehicle damage For the sake of the environment In view of the requirements for the environmentally friendly disposal of fluids and the special tools and knowledge required for such work we recommend that fluids be changed by a specialist garage Note a f there is anything you are not sure about concerning fluids please consult a specialist garage a Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the KODA Origi nal Accessories or from the SKODA Genuine Parts ranges 140 General Maintenance Opening and closing the bonnet Fig 125 Securing the bonnet A Read and observe H and on page 139 first Opening gt Pull the release lever under the dash panel in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 124 Before opening the bonnet ensure that the arms of the windscreen wipers are correctly in place against the windscreen otherwise the paintwork could be damaged gt Press the release lever in the direction of
109. audible and visual warn ing signals if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle c Note The working life of the alarm siren is 5 years Before leaving the car it must be checked that all of the windows doors and the electric sliding tilting roof are properly closed to ensure the full functional ity of the anti theft alarm system Coding of the radio remote control and the receiver unit precludes the use of the radio remote control from other vehicles Operation How is the alarm system activated The anti theft alarm system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the radio remote control or the key in the driver s door It is activated 30 seconds after locking the door How is the alarm system deactivated The alarm system is deactivated by pressing the amp button on the remote con trol The anti theft alarm system is reactivated if the vehicle is not opened within 30 seconds after transmitting the radio signal If the vehicle is unlocked by inserting the key into the driver door the key must be inserted into the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of unlocking the door to deactivate the alarm system The alarm is triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds When is the alarm triggered The following security areas of the locked vehicle are monitored gt bonnet gt boot lid gt doors gt ignition lock gt Vehicle inclination page 50 gt Inter
110. aware of it having taken place 150 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Tyre service life 152 New tyres 153 Unidirectional tyres 153 Tyre pressure monitor 154 Spare and back up wheel 154 Full wheel trim 155 Wheel bolts 155 Wheel bolts 156 E WARNING National legal requirements must be observed for the use of tyres D WARNING Instructions for the use of tyres a During the first 500 km new tyres do not offer optimum grip and appro priate care should therefore be taken when driving there is the risk of an accident On all four wheels use only radial tyres of the same type size rolling cir cumference and the same tread pattern For safety reasons do no replace tyres individually Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity for fitted tyres risk of accident a Never exceed the maximum permissible speed for fitted tyres risk of ac cident Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear impairs handling there is the risk of an accident E WARNING Continued Unusual vibrations or pulling of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of tyre damage If there is any doubt that a wheel is damaged immediately re duce your speed and stop If no external damage is evident drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist garage to have the vehicle checked Only use those tyres or wheel rims which have b
111. ay vZ The outside temperature is above approximately 2 C Display of selected interior temperature Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit change the displayed temperature units page 92 Automatic operation of the air conditioning system Ventilation or defrosting of the windscreen activated Direction of air flow Recirculated air mode activated Cooling system activated Blower speed set The buttons control dial Adjust the blower speed page 92 m Interior temperature sensor AUTO Automatic mode page 92 max De mist or de ice the windscreen page 93 2 Air flow to the windows 3 o 2 Air flow to the upper body o sj Air flow in the footwell If the coolant temperature is too high the cooling system is switched off to ensure that the engine cools down EF Note a We recommend that you have Climatronic cleaned by a specialist garage once every year During operation of the Climatronic under certain circumstances an increase in engine idle speed can occur in order to ensure adequate heating comfort Pelee Ml Heating and airconditioning 91 lt Switch recirculation on off page 92 A C Switch the cooling system on off Note Do not stick anything on or cover the interior temperature sensor 11 Fig 97 it could have an unfavourable effect on the Climatronic system Automatic mode The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and to demist the windows in the interior o
112. bag and the front seat belt tensioner on the side of the car on which the accident occurs The airbag covers the windows of the front and rear doors as well as the door pillar when it is deployed Fig 11 B Head impact with interior parts is reduced by the inflated head airbag The re duction in any impact to the head and the resultant minimizing of any move ments of the head additionally reduce the risk of injuries to the neck area E WARNING There must not be any objects in the deployment area of the head air bags which might prevent the airbags from inflating properly Only hang light items of clothing on the hooks fitted in the vehicle Never leave any heavy or sharp edged objects in the pockets of the items of clothing Additionally clothes hangers must not be used to hang up items of clothing The installation of impermissible accessories in the vicinity of the head airbags can considerably impair the protection offered by the head airbag in the event of it being deployed When the deployed head airbag is inflated parts of the accessories fitted could be thrown into the interior of the car and injure the occupants page 127 The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the deployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed There must not be any further pers
113. be topped up If the coolant level is below the mark 8 the coolant must be topped up Check the status gt Switch off the engine gt Open the bonnet gt Check the level of coolant at the coolant expansion vessel Fig 129 Check the coolant level only when the engine is cold If the engine is warm the test result may be inaccurate The stand can also be above the mark A Fig 129 If the coolant level in the coolant expansion tank is too low this is indicated by the warning light lighting up in the instrument cluster page 37 Cool ant We still recommend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time Loss of coolant A loss of coolant is first and foremost an indication of a leak in the system Do not merely top up the coolant Have the cooling system checked by a specialist garage Replenishing A Read and observe H and H on page 144 first Only top up with new coolant gt Switch off the engine gt Allow the engine to cool gt Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and carefully un screw the cap gt Replenish the coolant gt Turn the cap until it clicks into place Inspecting and replenishing 145 Do not use an alternative additive if the specified coolant is not available in an emergency In this case use just water and have the correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive restored by a specialist garage as soon as possible C
114. before the next time it is fitted Stow the ball head in the ready position with the key inserted in the box When doing so make the side opposite to the inserted key face downwards there is a risk of damaging the key Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever e g do not step on it Note We recommend that you put the protective cap on the ball before removing the ball head Clean any dirt from the ball head before stowing it away in the box with the vehicle tool kit Use and care A Read and observe H and on page 121 first Close the mounting recess with the cap to prevent any ingress of dirt Always check the ball head before hitching a trailer Apply a suitable grease where necessary Fit the protective cap when stowing away the ball head to protect the luggage compartment against dirt In the event of dirt clean the surfaces of the mounting recess and treat with a suitable preservative EE CAUTION Apply grease to the upper part of the mounting recess Make sure you do not remove any grease N Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Loading a trailer 125 Towing a trailer 125 Anti theft alarm system 126 I WARNING Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer Loading a trailer N Read and observe H on page 125 first The vehicle trailer combination must be balanced whereby the maximum per missible drawbar load must be uti
115. ble maximum speed of these tyres is not exceeded even if the possible maxi mum speed of the vehicle is higher The speed limit for winter tyres can be set in the MAXI DOT display in the Win ter tyres menu item page 34 156 General Maintenance For the sake of the environment Re fit the summer tyres at an appropriate time as they provide better handling properties a shorter braking distance less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at temperatures above 7 C The fuel consumption is also lower Snow chains When driving on wintry roads snow chains improve not only traction but also the braking performance Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels For technical reasons it is only permissible to fit snow chains with the follow ing wheel tyre combinations Wheel size 5 x 14 6J x 14 Depth D 35mm 37 mm Tyre size 165 70 185 60 43 mm 185 55 6 x 15 Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm EE CAUTION a The chains must be removed when driving on roads which are free of snow They adversely affect the handling of your vehicle damage the tyres and are rapidly destroyed Remove the full wheel trims page 155 before installing the snow chains Do it yourself CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects First aid kit and warning triangle 157 Fire extin
116. cessories Wheels 151 Tyre service life Fig 133 Principle sketch Tyre tread with wear indicators Open fuel filler flap with a table detailing the tyre sizes and tyre pressures LN Fig 134 Swapping wheels around A Read and observe H and M on page 150 first The life of tyres depends on the pressure driving style and other circumstan ces Following the advice below can extend the service life of your tyres Tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure including that of the spare wheel at least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey The tyre pressures for tyres are shown on the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 133 B The tyre pressure should be at the highest pressure specified for your vehicle at all times W Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold Do not reduce the higher pressure of warm tyres 152 General Maintenance Adjust the tyre pressure accordingly if you are carrying a greater load Driving style Fast cornering sharp acceleration and braking increase the wear of your tyres Balancing wheels The wheels of a new vehicle are balanced There are a wide range of influen ces when the car is being driven which may result in an imbalance This may become apparent by vibration in the steering Have the wheels rebalanced after replacing the tyres Wheel alignment errors Incorrect wheel alignment at the front or rear leads to excess wear on the
117. cident the child would be thrown through the vehicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occu pants a Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the vehicle is moving This particularly applies to children who are transported on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe or even fatal injuries if the airbag system is deployed Transporting children safely 19 E WARNING Continued a Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt Seat belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi nor accidents a Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp edged fit tings a It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel Further information page 20 Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Note We recommend that you use child seats from SKODA Original Accessories These child seats were developed and also tested for use in SKODA vehicles They meet the ECE R 44 standard Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat Never use a rearward facing child
118. cipation in driving 110 Ballast 112 Driving at full throttle 11 Idling 111 Regular maintenance 112 Saving energy 112 Short distances 11 Tyre pressure 171 EDS 116 Electrical power windows Button in the driver s door 5152 Button in the rear door 52 Central locking system 53 Electric power windows Operational faults 53 Electric sliding tilting roof 54 Electronic Differential Lock 116 Electronic immobilizer 102 Emergency Changing a wheel 158 Hazard warning light system 60 Jump starting 163 164 locking of the doors 45 Selector lever unlocking 109 Sliding tilting roof 55 Towing the vehicle 165 Towing the vehicle using the tow hitch ____ 1166 Tyre repair 161 Unlocking the boot lid 51 Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher 157 First aid kit 157 Jack 158 Vehicle tool kit 158 Warning triangle 157 Emissions 176 Engine Running in 109 Starting and stopping the engine 102 Starting the engine 103 Switching off the engine 103 Engine compartment 139 Brake fluid 146 Coolant 145 Overview 141 Vehicle battery 146 Engine number 175 Engine oil 142 Capacity 142 Changing 144 Checking 143 Replenishing 144 Specifications 142 Warning light 36 Engine revolutions counter 27 Environment 110 Environmental compatibility 112 Environmentally friendly driving 110 ESC Function 115 warning light 38 F Films 132 Fire extinguisher 157 First ai
119. cle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 60 a f the warning light page 36 is displayed simultaneously with the ABS warning light do not continue your journey Seek help from a special ist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi cle s braking distance there is a risk of accident The rear fog light N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 0 comes on when the rear fog lights are operat ing page 59 Bulb failure N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light comes on if a bulb is faulty gt within a few seconds of the ignition being switched on gt when a light with a defective bulb is switched on The following message may be shown in the MAXI DOT display for example INFORMATION Check front right low beam Note The rear side lights and the licence plate lighting have several light bulbs The indicator light only lights up if all light bulbs of the licence plate lighting or the parking light in one rear light are defective For this reason regular check that these light bulbs are working correctly Exhaust inspection system A Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light lights up there is a fault in the exhaust inspection sys tem The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialis
120. clip the cap on the top of the fuel filler flap Fig 123 B Closing the filler cap gt Turn the filler cap to the right until it clicks into place gt Hold the fuel filler cap on the fuel filler tube with one hand and lock it by turning the vehicle key to the right and remove the key gt Close the filler cap TE CAUTION Before refuelling it is necessary to switch off the auxiliary heating system auxiliary heating and ventilation The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time provided the nozzle has been operated properly Do not continue filling the fuel tank otherwise the expansion volume is filled up FF Note The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres including a reserve of approx 7 litres 1 In Germany also DIN 51626 1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 91 or DIN 51626 2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane rating 95 or 98 Unleaded petrol A Read and observe H and on page 136 first The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol in compliance with the EN 228 standard All petrol engines can be operated using petrol with a maximum of 10 bioe thanol E10 Specified fuel unleaded petrol 95 91 or 92 or 93 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON Unleaded petrol with the octane ratings 91 92 or 93 RON can also be used but may result in a slight loss in performance Prescribed fuel unleaded pe
121. ctor lever lock is defective or its power supply is interrupted e g dis charged vehicle battery faulty fuse the selector lever can no longer be moved out of position P in the normal manner and the vehicle can no longer be driv en The selector lever emergency unlocking procedure is as follows gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Carefully pull up the front left and right cover gt Pull up rear cover gt Use a finger to press the yellow plastic part in the direction of the ar row Fig 107 gt At the same time press the locking button in the selector lever and move the selector lever to N The selector lever will be locked once more if it is moved again to P CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects New engine 109 New tyres T10 New brake pads 110 New engine The engine has to be run in during the first 1 500 kilometres Up to 1000 kilometres gt Do not drive faster than 3 4 of the maximum speed of the gear in use i e 3 4 of the maximum permissible engine speed gt No full throttle gt Avoid high engine speeds gt Do not tow a trailer From 1000 up to 1500 kilometres Gradually increase the power output of the engine up to the full speed of the gear engaged i e up to the maximum permissible engine speed The red scale on the rev counter indicates the range in which the system be gins to limit the engine speed During the first operating hours t
122. d kg 550 5009 560 4509 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 1 6 litres 77 kW engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 77 5600 153 3800 4 1598 Top speed km h 190 185 192 186 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 4 MS 10 5 11 6 Operating weight in kg 1114 1159 1134 1179 Permissible trailer load braked kg 10002 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 550 5009 570 500 560 450 580 450 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 180 Technical data 1 4 ltr 132 kW TSI engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 132 6200 250 2000 4500 4 1390 Performance and Weights FABIA RS ESTATE RS Top speed km h Acceleration 0 100 km h s Operating weight in kg 1 2 Itr 55 kW TDI CR DPF engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 55 4200 180 2000 3 1199 Performance and Weights PASIA ESTATE ESTATE GreenLine GreenLine Top speed km h 172 167 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 2 14 3 Operating weight in kg 1203 1209 Permissible trailer load braked kg 10002 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 590 5009 600 4509 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS Technical data 181 1 6 Itr 55 kW TDI CR
123. d degreased with cleaning agents especially formulated for the task after an automatic wash with wax HE WARNING Fold in the exterior mirrors to prevent damage before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash system Washing with a high pressure cleaner A Read and observe H and on page 129 first When washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner the instructions for use of the equipment must be observed This applies in particular to the pres sure used and to the spraying distance Maintain a sufficiently large distance to the parking aid sensors and soft mate rials such as rubber hoses or insulation material E WARNING Never use circular spray nozzles or dirt cutters EE CAUTION Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening joints when washing the vehicle in the winter using a hose or high pressure cleaner there is a risk of freezing To avoid damaging the parking aid sensors while cleaning with high pressure cleaners or steam jets the sensors must only be directly sprayed for short pe riods while a minimum distance of 10 cm must be observed 130 General Maintenance The temperature of the water used for cleaning must not exceed 60 C there is a risk of damaging the vehicle See also Washing a vehicle with decorative film trim using a high pressure cleaner page 132 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects
124. d kit 157 Flashers 58 Fog lights 58 Footmats 105 see Footmats 105 Front airbag 15 Front seats 66 Fuel 136 Diesel 138 Fuel gauge 27 gauge 27 refer to Fuel 136 Refuelling Unleaded petrol fuel consumption Fuel consumption Fuses Assignment Changing Colour coding G Gear Recommended gear Gearbox Display messages Gear changing Gear stick General view Cockpit Glow plug system Warning light GSM H Handbrake Hazard warning light system Head airbag 137 137 176 T10 167 167 167 28 34 105 25 33 93 105 Headlight cleaning system Headlight cleaning system Headlights Driving abroad Headlight cleaning system Head restraint Storing in the seat squabs Heating Deicing the windows Exterior mirrors Operating Operation Rear window Recirculated air mode 88 Seats 67 Heating and air conditioning 85 Hill hold control 115 Horn 25 Ignition 103 Ignition lock 103 Immobilizer 102 Individual settings locking 46 unlocking 46 Inertia reel 13 Instrument cluster 26 Overview 26 see instrument cluster 26 Interior monitor 50 ISOFIX 22 J Jack 158 Jacking points Raise vehicle 160 Jump starting 163 164 L Light Beam adjustment 57 Cockpit 60 Headlight flash 58 Lights 56 Cockpit 60 61 Daylight runnin
125. d manually Error Start stop system ERROR START STOP A system error is present Seek help from a specialist garage CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Description 122 Adjusting the ready position 122 Fitting the ball head 123 Check proper fitting 123 Removing the ball head 124 Use and care 124 If your vehicle has already been factory fitted with towing equipment or is fit ted with towing equipment from SKODA Original Accessories then it meets all of the technical requirements and national legal provisions for towing a trailer Your vehicle is fitted with a 13 pin power socket for the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer If the trailer that is to be towed has a 7 pin connector you can use a suitable adapter from SKODA Original Accessories The maximun trailer drawbar load is 50 kg E WARNING a Check that the ball head is seated correctly and is secured in the mount ing recess before starting any journey Do not use the ball head if it is not correctly inserted in the mounting re cess Do not use the towing equipment if it is damaged or incomplete Do not modify or adapt the towing equipment in any way Never release the ball head while the trailer is still coupled CAUTION Take care with the ball head to avoid damaging the paintwork on the bumper Towing atrailer 121 Description Fig 118 Ball head A Re
126. d position of the rear seat passengers a f the rear seat next to the folded forward seat is occupied ensure maxi mum safety e g by placing the goods to be transported in such a way that the seat is prevented from folding back in case of a rear collision a Never drive with the tailgate fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Under no circumstances should the permissible axle loads and permissi ble gross weight of the vehicle be exceeded there is the risk of an acci dent Never transport people in the boot EE CAUTION Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not damaged as a result of abrasive objects 70 Using the system FI Note Tyre pressure must be adjusted to the load page 152 Tyre service life Class N1 vehicles Q Read and observe H and M on page 70 first On class N1 vehicles which are not fitted with a protective grille a lashing set which complies with the standard EN 12195 1 4 must be used for fastening the load The proper functioning of the electrical system is essential for the safe opera tion of the vehicle It is important to ensure that it is not damaged during mod ifications or when loading or unloading the luggage compartment Fastening elements B5J 0495 Fig 61 Boot Lashing eyes and fastening elements CQ Read and observe H and M on page 70 first The following fas
127. d up to the maximum weight limit specified in the fitting instructions CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Cupholders 79 Ashtray 79 Cigarette lighter 80 12 volt power outlet 80 Clothes hook 81 Car park ticket holder 81 E WARNING Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down while you are driving under acceleration or when cornering and could distract you from the traffic there is a risk of an accident Make sure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell while you are driving You would not be able to brake operate the clutch pedal or accelerate danger of causing an accident a Ash and cigarette or cigar stubs must only be discarded in ashtrays Cupholders B5J 0506 Fig 78 Cup holder A Read and observe H on page 79 first Two beverage containers can be placed into the recesses A Fig 78 One beverage container can be placed into the recess B H WARNING Never put hot cups in the cup holder They may spill as the vehicle moves there is a risk of scalding No objects should be placed in the holders that might endanger the vehi cle s occupants if the vehicle brakes suddenly or the vehicle is in collision Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material e g glass porcelain This could lead to injuries in the eve
128. designed for fastening on the seat with the seat belt This chapter contains information on the following subjects ISOFIX system attachment points 22 Use of child seats with the ISOFIX system 22 TOP TETHER system attachment points 23 Fig 16 ISOFIX system label There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the ISOFIX system child seat in place The places are marked with labels with the ISOFIX logo Fig 16 E WARNING a Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat when installing and removing a child seat with the ISOFIX system Never attach other child seats belts or objects to the attachment points eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the ISOFIX system risk of death FF Note a A child seat fitted with the ISOFIX system can only be mounted in a vehicle fitted with an ISOFIX system if the child seat has been approved for this type of vehicle Further information is available from a KODA Partner a Child seats with the ISOFIX system can be purchased from KODA Original Accessories Overview of the use of child seats fastened with the ISOFIX system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Size class 5 of the child seat Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle 0 up to 10 kg X IL SU X 0 E up to 13 kg X IL SU X 22 Safety Size class of the child seat
129. difficult conditions on poor roads etc Fuel consumption can vary considerably from the manufacturer s data as a re sult of outside temperatures the weather and driving style The optimal engine speed should be maintained when accelerating to avoid a high fuel consumption and resonance of the vehicle EE CAUTION All the speed and engine revolution figures apply only when the engine is at its normal operating temperature Driving with anticipation N Read and observe M on page 110 first A vehicle s highest fuel consumption occurs when accelerating therefore un necessary accelerating and braking should be avoided If looking ahead when driving less braking and consequently less accelerating are required If possible let your vehicle coast to a stop or use the engine brake if you can see that the next set of traffic lights is on red for example Economical gear changing Fig 108 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in litres 100 km depending on the selected gear Q Read and observe M on page 110 first Shifting up early saves on fuel Manual gearbox gt Drive no more than about one length of your vehicle in first gear gt Shift up into the next gear at approximately 2000 rpm An effective way of achieving good fuel economy is to shift up early Observe the recommended gear page 28 Recommended gear A suitably selected gear can have an effect on fuel consumption Fig 108 Automatic gearbox gt
130. duction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing 51 Automatic locking of the boot lid 51 Emergency unlocking 51 HH WARNING a Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the boot lid Other wise the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving even if the lid was locked risk of accident Never drive with the tailgate fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle risk of poisoning Do not press on the rear window when closing the tailgate as otherwise this could crack there is a risk of injury FF Note After closing the boot lid it is automatically locked within 1 second and the anti theft alarm system is activated This applies only if the vehicle was locked before closing the boot lid a The function of the handle above the licence plate is deactivated when start ing off or at a speed of 5 km hour or more for vehicles with central locking The function of the handle is activated again when the vehicle has stopped anda door is opened Opening closing Fig 35 Unlock the boot lid boot lid handle A Read and observe H on page 50 first After unlocking the vehicle you can open the lid by pushing the handle located above the licence plate Opening the boot lid for vehicles without central locking gt Press the lt button in the driver s door Fig 35 A and lift the boot lid in the direction o
131. e 87 Symbol key Fig 95 Air outlet vents 4 Fig 94 on Setting a Defrosting the windshield and side To the right up to the windows stop Free windshield and side windows Desired temperature from mist on page 87 page 86 Open and align with the side Do not switch on window Open and align with the side Do not switch on window To the stop to the The fastest heating right Briefly switch on Opening Comfortable heating Desired temperature 2or3 Do not switch on Opening To the stop to the left Desired position Fresh air mode ventilation We recommend that you leave the air outlet vents 3 Fig 94 on page 86 in the open position in all operating modes FE Note If the air distribution is directed only towards the windows the total amount of air is used to defrost the windows and thus no air will be fed to the footwell This can limit the heating comfort Recirculated air mode Recirculated air mode prevents polluted air from outside the vehicle getting in to the vehicle for example when driving through a tunnel or when standing in a traffic jam Switching on off gt Press the button The indicator light in the button lights up gt Press the button again The indicator light in the button goes out 88 Using the system Do not switch on Opening Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con trol C
132. e adapter page 96 gt Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display page 97 gt Voice control of the telephone page 98 gt Music playback from the telephone or other multimedia units page 99 All communication between a mobile phone and your vehicle s hands free sys tem is established with the help of Bluetooth technology The adapter serves only for charging the telephone and for transmitting the signal to the vehicle s external aerial Note The following guidelines must be observed page 93 Mobile phones and two way radio systems Phone Phonebook A phone phonebook is part of the hands free system This phone phonebook can be used depending on the type of mobile phone After the first connection of the telephone the system begins to load the phone book from the phone and the SIM card into the memory of the control unit Each time the telephone has established a new connection with the hands free system an update of the relevant phone book is performed The updating can take a few minutes During this time the phone book which was stored af ter the last update was completed is available Newly stored telephone num bers are only shown after the updating has ended The update is interrupted if a telephone event e g incoming or outgoing call voice control dialogue occurs during the updating procedure After the tele phone event has ended the updating starts anew The internal phonebook provides 2 5
133. e airbag system consists depending on the vehicle equipment of the following modules gt Electronic control unit gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger page 15 gt Side airbags page 16 gt Head airbags page 17 gt Airbag indicator light in the instrument cluster page 40 gt Key switch for the front passenger airbag page 18 gt Warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation in dash panel cen tre page 18 Note The airbag system needs no maintenance during its working life f you sell your vehicle provide the complete vehicle documentation to the new owner Please note that the information relating to the possibility of de activating the front passenger airbag must be included When disposing of vehicle or parts of the airbag system it is important to comply with the national legal requirements Airbag deployment CQ Read and observe H on page 14 first The airbags inflate in fractions of a second and at a high speed in order to be able to offer that additional protection in the event of an accident The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on In certain accident situations the several airbags may be deployed simultane ously The airbags are not deployed in the case of minor frontal and side collisions rear end collisions tilting of the vehicle and vehicle rollover Deployment factors It is not possible to generally deter
134. e box by first inserting the plastic plugs and then pushing the entire part upwards Note It is necessary after each emergency operation using the Allen key to move the sliding tilting roof into the basic position This is why the rotary switch must be set to position A Fig 38 on page 54 and pressed forwards for about 10 seconds Unlocking andlocking 55 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Parking and low beam lights 56 Headlight beam adjustment 57 Daylight running lights DAY LIGHT 57 Turn signal and main beam lights 58 Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function 58 Fog lights 58 Foglights with the CORNER function 59 Rear fog light 59 Tourist lights 59 Hazard warning light system 60 Parking lights 60 The lights work only with the ignition on unless otherwise stated The layout of the controls on right hand drive vehicles partially differs from that shown in Fig 40 on page 56 The symbols which mark the positions of the controls are identical U WARNING Never drive with only the side lights on The side lights are not bright enough to light up the road sufficiently in front of you or to be seen by oth er oncoming traffic Therefore always switch on the low beam when it is dark or if visibility is poor The activation of the lights should only be undertaken in accordance with national legal requirements a The driver is
135. e connector in the bulb gt Fit the rubber cover A Changing the low beam and high beam bulb halogen projector headlights Fig 156 Removing bulbs for low beam low and main beam A Read and observe H and on page 170 first gt Remove the rubber cover 1 Fig 154 on page 170 gt Turn the socket with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the ar row Fig 156 and remove it gt Replace the bulb insert the connector and new bulb and turn to the stop in the opposite direction to that of the arrow gt Fit the rubber cover 1 Changing the high beam bulb halogen projector headlights a W x Fig 157 N Removing the bulb for the main beam B5J 040 A Read and observe H and H on page 170 first gt Remove the rubber cover 2 Fig 154 on page 170 gt Turn the connector with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the ar row Fig 157 and remove it gt Replace the bulb insert the connector and new bulb and turn to the stop in the opposite direction to that of the arrow gt Fit the rubber cover 2 Changing the front turn signal bulb A Read and observe H and H on page 170 first gt Remove the bulb holder B Fig 154 on page 170 or the bulb holder 3 to the stop in an anti clockwise direction and remove with the bulb for the turn signal gt Replace the bulb insert the bulb holder with the new bulb and turn clock wise to the stop Changing the front parking light b
136. e driver s footwell as these may get caught in the pedal apparatus when driving or braking You would then no longer be able to operate the clutch brake or acceleration pedals Adjusting the steering wheel position Adjustable steering wheel Lever below steering wheel BS5J 0603 AN Read and observe H on page 7 first The height and forward back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted gt Swivel the lever underneath the steering wheel downwards Fig 2 gt Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position with regard to the height and forward back position gt Push the lever upwards to the stop 8 Safety E WARNING The lever for adjusting the steering wheel must be locked while you are driving so that the position of the steering wheel cannot accidently change during the journey there is the risk of an accident a Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when the vehicle is stationary Correct seated position of the front passenger A Read and observe H on page 7 first For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident the follow ing instructions must be observed Jv J Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible The front pas senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head res
137. e surface of the windows and mirrors Never remove snow or ice from glass parts using warm or hot water there is a risk of cracking in glass a When removing snow or ice from windows and mirror lenses ensure that the paintwork of the vehicle is not to damage Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp edged objects or corro sive and acidic cleaning agents there is a risk of damaging the heating ele ments or window aerial Headlight lenses QO Read and observe H and on page 130 first Clean the plastic headlight lenses with clean warm water and soap EE CAUTION Never wipe the headlights dry Do not use any sharp objects to clean the plastic lenses this may damage the protective lacquer and consequently cause the cracking on the headlight lenses Do not use any aggressive cleaning or chemical solvent products to clean the headlights there is a risk of damaging the headlight lenses Door lock cylinders A Read and observe H and on page 130 first Specific products must be used for de icing door lock cylinders EE CAUTION When washing your vehicle ensure as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinders Underbody waxing N Read and observe H and on page 130 first All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory Wax protection does not require to be inspected or re treated If any smal
138. e vehicle gt Shift the gear lever to Neutral gt Release the clutch pedal Automatic engine shutdown takes place segment display shows START STOP ACTIVE or a check mark appears in the MAXI DOT display Fig 115 on page 119 Automatic engine start gt Depress the clutch pedal The automatic start procedure takes place again 120 Driving System conditioned automatic start up AN Read and observe H on page 119 first When the engine is off the system can automatically start the engine before the desired journey continues The possible reasons for this are for example gt The vehicle has begun to roll e g on a slope gt The brake pedal has been actuated several times gt The current consumption is too high Manually TW Fig 116 Button for the START STOP sys qi Open a AN Read and observe H on page 119 first Deactivate activate gt Press the amp button Fig 116 When start stop mode is deactivated the warning light in the button lights up F Note If the system is automatically deactivated when the engine is turned off then the automatic start process takes place Information messages N Read and observe H on page 119 first The messages and information are shown in the instrument cluster display Start the engine manually START MANUALLY One of the conditions for automatic engine start is not satisfied or the driver s seat belt is not fastened The engine must be starte
139. e window will stop and open again by several centimetres Always make sure that the windows are closed when you leave the locked vehicle For the sake of the environment At high speeds you should keep the windows closed to prevent unnecessarily high fuel consumption EF Note a After switching the ignition off it is still possible to open or close the win dows for approx 10 minutes After the driver s or front passenger s door has been opened the windows can only be operated by using A Fig 37 on page 52 s When driving always use the existing heating air conditioning and ventila tion system for ventilating the interior of the vehicle If the windows are opened dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds 52 Using the system Opening closing the windows B5J 0482 Fig 37 Buttons on the driver s door in the rear doors CQ Read and observe H and on page 52 first Power window buttons Fig 37 A Button for electrical power window of the driver s door Button for electrical power window of the front passenger door Button for electrical power window of the rear right door D Button for electrical power window of the rear left door S Safety pushbutton The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is switched on Opening gt A window is opened by pressing lightly on the relevant button The opening process stops w
140. e windows can be opened and closed when unlocking and locking the vehi cle page 53 FE CAUTION If the safe securing system is activated page 46 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate Note In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle Upon failure of the central locking system only the driver s door can be un locked or locked using the key The other doors and the tailgate can be man ually locked or unlocked Emergency locking of the door page 45 a Emergency unlocking of the boot lid page 51 Individual settings QI Read and observe M on page 46 first Opening a single door This selection function makes it possible to only unlock the driver s door The other doors remain locked and are only unlocked when the command is repea ted Automatic locking and unlocking All the doors and the boot lid are locked automatically once the car reaches a speed of about 15 km h 46 Using the system If the ignition key is withdrawn the car is then automatically unlocked again In addition it is possible for the driver or front passenger to unlock the car by pressing the central locking button page 47 The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of the respective door Note Individual settings can be applied in a s
141. eated position of the rear seat passengers Examples of incorrect seated positions HH WARNING The front seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened properly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers a Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat Children must be fastened page 19 Transporting children safely with a suitable restraint system a f the occupant adopts an incorrect seated position he is exposed to life threatening injuries in case he is hit by a deployed airbag a f the occupants on the rear seats are not sitting upright the risk of injury is increased due to incorrect routing of the seat belt a The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving as this will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system risk of injury oO WO ON Correct seated position of the driver Aig LA AVZ Fig 1 The correct distance of the driver to the steering wheel correctly adjusted head restraint A Read and observe H on page 7 first For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident we recommend the following settings v Adjust the driver s seat in the forward back direction so that the pedals can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs v Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel c
142. eats do not turn on the seat heater there is a risk of damaging the seat covers and seat heating Do not clean the seats using moisture page 135 FF Note a The seat heating should only be switched on when the engine is running This has a significant effect of saving on the battery capacity a f the on board voltage drops the seat heating is switched off automatically in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the engine con trol page 150 Automatic load deactivation CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Folding the seat backrest forwards 67 Folding the seat cushions forwards removing 68 Folding the seat backrest forwards Fig 57 Unlock the seat backrest Seats and storage 67 The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr ests forward The seat backrests can be folded forward individually on vehicles with divided rear seats Folding forward gt Before folding the rear seats forwards adapt the position of the front seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the folded rear seats gt Unlock the seat backrest by pressing the securing knob A Fig 57 and fold it forwards gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest gt Fold the seat backrest completely forwards Folding backwards gt Push the head restraint into the slightly lifted seat backrest gt Then push the seat backrest back into the u
143. econd Starting off and Driving 107 When accelerating the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached If a lower gear is selected the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine overrevving Note It may be advantageous to use manual gear shifting when driving downhill for example Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence brake wear page 104 Information for braking Starting off and driving A Read and observe H and H on page 106 first Starting off gt Start the engine gt Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal gt Press and hold the shiftlock button on the selector lever grip gt Move the selector lever into the desired position page 106 and then release the lock button gt Release the brake pedal and accelerate Stop gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Keep holding the brake pedal until driving is resumed The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a short time such as at a cross roads Parking gt Fully depress and hold the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop gt Firmly apply the handbrake gt Press and hold the shiftlock button on the selector lever grip gt Move the selector lever to the P position and then release the shiftlock but ton Kickdown The kickdown function allows you to
144. ector lever into position P Allow the engine to cool Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the engine compartment there is a risk of scalding Wait until the steam or coolant has stopped escaping WARNING Information for working in the engine room Keep all people especially children away from the engine compartment Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is still warm The fan might suddenly start running Do not touch any hot engine parts there is a risk of burns The coolant is harmful to health a Avoid contact with the coolant a Coolant vapours are harmful to health a Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the engine is still warm The cooling system is pressurized When opening the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir cover it with a cloth to protect your face hands and arms from hot steam or hot coolant f any coolant splashes into your eyes immediately rinse out your eyes with clear water and contact a doctor as soon as possible Always keep the coolant in the original container safe from people who are not completely independent especially children there is a danger of poisoning Consult a doctor immediately if coolant is swallowed Do not leave any items e g cleaning cloths or tools in the engine com partment There is a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage Never spill fluids on the hot engine Such f
145. ed for permanent use E WARNING a Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted Never use the temporary spare wheel if it is damaged f the dimensions or design of the temporary spare wheel differ from the fitted tyres never drive faster than 80 km h or 50 mph a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering TE CAUTION Observe the instructions on the warning sign of the temporary spare wheel Full wheel trim A Read and observe H and F on page 150 first Pulling off gt Hook the clamp found in the vehicle tool kit page 158 into the reinforced edge of the wheel trim gt Push the wheel wrench through the clamp support on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim Fitting gt Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the valve opening provided gt Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference latches correctly into position EE CAUTION Use the pressure of your hand only do not strike the full wheel trim Avoid striking the trim heavily when it is not yet inserted in the wheel rim This could cause damage to the guide and centring elements of the trim When using the anti theft wheel bolt ensure that it is in the hole in the valve area page 161 Securing wheels against theft a f wheel trims are retrofitted it must be ensured that an adequate flow of air is assured to cool the brake system Wheel bolts Fig 137 Remove the cap A Read and observe
146. ed limit v Always adjust the driving speed to the road traffic and weather condi tions Y Take regular breaks on long journeys at least every two hours Safety equipment A Read and observe H on page 6 first The following list contains only part of the safety equipment in your vehicle gt Three point seat belts for all the seats gt Belt force limiters for the front seats gt Belt tensioners for the front seats gt Seat belt height adjusters for the front seats gt Front airbag for the driver and the front passenger gt Side airbags gt Head airbags gt Anchoring points for child seats using the ISOFIX system gt Anchoring points for child seats using the TOP TETHER system gt Head restraints adjustable for height gt Adjustable steering column The specified safety equipment works together in order to optimally protect you and those travelling with you in accident situations The safety equipment does not protect you or the people travelling with you if you or your occupants adopt an incorrect seated position or the equipment is not correctly adjusted or used If the seat belt is not fastened properly this may result in injuries during an accident caused by the deployed airbag CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Correct seated position of the driver Adjusting the steering wheel position Correct seated position of the front passenger Correct s
147. ed must be replaced by a specialist garage Damaged seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident and were therefore stretched must be replaced this is best done by a specialist garage The anchorage points of the belts must also be inspec ted The anchorage points for the belts should also be checked The national legal requirements must be observed when using seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision S Y A BNH 0133 Fig 4 Driver without a fastened seat belt rear seat passenger without a fastened seat belt Q Read and observe H on page 10 first As soon as the vehicle is moving so called kinetic energy the energy of mo tion is produced both in terms of the car as well as in terms of the occupants The magnitude of this kinetic energy depends essentially on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and on the weight of the vehicle including the occupants The greater the speed and weight increase the greater the amount of energy which has to be absorbed in the event of an accident The speed of the vehicle is the most important factor Doubling the speed of the vehicle from 25 km h up to 50 km hour increases the kinetic energy four times The notion that it is possible to support your body with your hands in a minor accident is incorrect Even in a collision at only a low speed the forces acting on the body are such that it is no longer possible to support your body Even if you onl
148. ed off the Climatronic system is switched off The blower speed set is indicated by displaying the corresponding number of segments in icon 9 Fig 97 on page 97 in the display E WARNING a Stale air may result in fatigue in the driver and occupants reduce atten tion levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an ac cident increases Do not switch off the Climatronic system for longer than necessary Switch on the Climatronic system as soon as the windows mist up Defrosting windscreen Switching on gt Press the maxq button Fig 97 on page 91 Switching off gt Press the maxq button Fig 97 on page 97 again or press the AUTO button More air flows out of the air outlet vents 1 and 2 Fig 94 on page 86 The temperature control is controlled automatically CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Mobile phones and two way radio systems 93 Introductory information 94 Phone Phonebook 94 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel 95 Inserting the mobile phone and adapter 95 Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter 96 Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system 96 Symbols in the MAXI DOT display 97 Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display 97 Mobile phones and two way radio systems SKODA permits the operation of mobile phones and two way radio systems with a professionally in
149. een approved by KODA for your model of vehicle Failure to observe this instruction will adversely affect the road safety of your vehicle there is the risk of an accident H WARNING Information regarding tyre damage or wear Never use tyres if you do not know anything about the condition and age Never drive with damaged tyres there is the risk of an accident Immediately replace damaged wheel rims or tyres a You must have your tyres replaced with new ones at the latest when the wear indicators have been worn down Worn tyres do not provide the necessary grip particularly at high speeds on wet roads Aquaplaning uncontrolled movements of the vehicle swimming on a wet road surface could be the result E WARNING Information on tyre pressure The tyre control display does not absolve the driver of the responsibility to ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure Check the tyre pressure at regular intervals Pressures that are too low or too high impair handling there is the risk of an accident a f the pressure is too low the tyre must overcome a greater rolling resist ance This will heat the tyre up especially at higher speeds This can result in tread separation and a tyre blowout a WARNING Information on the wheel bolts a The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never treat them with grease or oil a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al l
150. eginning and at the end of the cold season H WARNING Never use additional underbody protection or anti corrosion agents for ex haust pipes catalytic converters diesel particle filters or heat shields These substances could ignite when the engine reaches its operating tem perature there is a risk of fire QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Natural leather 134 Synthetic leather fabrics and Alcantara 135 Seat covers ao Seat belts 135 Regular and proper care help to retain the efficiency and value of your vehicle We recommend using care products from SKODA Original Accessories that are available from SKODA Partners The instructions for use on the package must be observed E WARNING Care products may be harmful to your health if not used according to the instructions a Always keep the automobile care products safe from people who are not completely independent e g children there is a danger of poisoning Carcare 133 EE CAUTION Be sure to check clothing for colourfastness to avoid any damage or visible Stains on the material leather panels and textiles Remove fresh stains such as those from ball point pens ink lipstick shoe polish etc from the material leather panels and textiles as quickly as possi ble a Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the temperature inside the vehicle is high Do not attach scents and
151. ehicle battery there is a risk of explosion Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery there is a risk of explo sion and caustic burns Replace a frozen vehicle battery Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns E WARNING a When you charge a battery hydrogen is released and a highly explosive gas mixture is also produced An explosion can be caused through sparkling over during unclamping or loosening of the cable plug while the ignition is on Bridging the poles on the battery e g with a metal object cable creates a short circuit there is a risk of melting the lead terminals explosion the battery burning of acid being ejected a Avoid creating sparks when working with cables and electrical devices Strong sparking represents a risk of injury Before carrying out any work on the electrical system switch off the en gine the ignition and all electrical components and disconnect the negative terminal on the battery EE CAUTION Improper handling of the battery can lead to damage occurring We recom mend having all work on the vehicle battery be undertaken by a specialist ga rage Inspecting and replenishing 147 EE CAUTION The vehicle battery must only be disconnected if the ignition is switched off otherwise the vehicle s electrical system electronic components can be dam aged When disconnecting the battery from t
152. elop within the adjustment mechanism of the backrest angle 66 Using the system Adjusting the front seats Version 1 Fig 54 Control elements on the seat N Read and observe H on page 66 first Adjusting a seat fore and aft gt Pull lever 1 Fig 54 up and push the seat into the desired position gt Release the lever 1 and push the seat until the lock clicks into place Adjusting height of seat gt To lift the seat pull or pump lever 2 Fig 54 upwards gt To lower the seat push or pump the lever 2 downwards Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt To adjust the angle of the backrest relieve any pressure from the seat back rest do not lean on it and turn handwheel 3 Fig 54 Adjusting the front seats Variant 2 PG 3S Control elements on the seat N Read and observe H on page 66 first Adjusting a seat fore and aft gt Pull the lever in the middle 1 Fig 55 up and push the seat to the desired position gt Release the lever 1 and push the seat until the lock clicks into place Adjusting height of seat gt To lift the seat pull or pump lever 2 Fig 55 upwards gt To lower the seat push or pump the lever 2 downwards Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest gt Relieve the load on the seat backrest do not lean on it pull the lever 3 Fig 55 towards the rear and set the desired angle of the seat backrest with the back gt After releasing the le
153. encounter on their travels My dealer choose your nearest or preferred Service Centre Assistance contact the Assistance Service or your favourite dealer My car complete Owner s Manual and summary list of all control lamps for quick review Octavia 01 2013 Available to download from AppStore for iOS and Google Play for Android SKODA Manual App Know your vehicle The SKODA Manual application aims on users of tablet PCs who are interested in SKODA vehicles or already own one The application contains full featured digital version of the Owner s Manual for all current SKODA models Navigation through the list of content gt Classical reading page by page gt Full text search throughout the whole manual gt Bookmarks for fast access to favourite chapters www skoda auto com You also can do something for the environment The fuel consumption of your SKODA and the related pollutant emissions are determined crucially on how you drive The noise and the wear of the vehicle depend on the way how you deal with your vehicle This Owner s Manual shows you how to use your SKODA vehi cle with utmost care for the environment while driving eco nomically at the same time Also please pay attention to those parts in the Owner s Manual that are marked amp below Work with us for the sake of the environment Navod k obsluze Fabia anglicky 05 2014 55550 10 16 20 5J6 O12 720 AG
154. engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 55 4000 195 1500 2000 4 1598 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 166 167 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 14 1 14 2 Operating weight in kg 1204 1224 Permissible trailer load braked kg 10002 1200 Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 600 500 610 450 a Uphills up to 12 b Uphills up to 8 Vehicles without ABS 1 6 Itr 66 kW TDI CR engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 66 4200 230 1500 2500 4 1598 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 176 177 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 12 6 12 7 Operating weight in kg 1204 1224 Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 600 500 610 4507 a Vehicles without ABS 182 Technical data 1 6 Itr 77 kW TDI CR engine Output kW at rpm Maximum torque Nm at rpm Number of cylinders displacement cm 7714400 250 1500 2500 4 1598 Performance and Weights ESTATE Top speed km h 188 190 Acceleration 0 100 km h s 10 9 11 0 Operating weight in kg 1219 1239 Permissible trailer load braked kg Permissible trailer load unbraked kg 600 500 610 450 a Vehicles without ABS Technical data 183 A Abroad Driving
155. ents in the boot gt Grasp the carrier rail A at position 2 and slacken it by pulling in the direc Using the net partition behind the rear seats tion of arrow gt The carrier rail on the other side of the luggage compartment can be re moved in the same way Fitting gt Position the carrier rails on the sides of the boot gt Press the two securing points B Fig 69 on each carrier rail to the stop gt Check the attachment of the carrier rails by pulling it E WARNING Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when fitting the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk l an of injury for the occupants Fig 70 Extending retracting the net partition A Read and observe H on page 74 first Extending gt Open the rear right door gt Fold down the rear seat backrests slightly forwards which makes it possible to clear the access for removing the net partition 74 Using the system gt Pull the net partition by tab A Fig 70 out of the housing B in the direc tion of mounts C gt Insert the transverse rod into one of the mounts C and push forwards gt Insert the transverse rod into the mount C on the other side of the vehicle in the same way gt Then push the seat backrest back into the upright position until the securing knob clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest Retracting gt Pull the transverse rod b
156. er position any body parts such as arms or legs under the vehicle while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack Never start the engine with the vehicle sitting on the raised jack there is a risk of injury H WARNING Information on the wheel bolts a The wheel bolts must be clean and must turn easily Never treat them with grease or oil a The prescribed tightening torque of the wheel bolts for steel and light al loy wheels is 120 Nm a f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening tor que which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident Note The national legal requirements must be observed when changing a wheel Preparation QO Read and observe H on page 158 first Always change a wheel on a level surface as far as possible The following steps must be carried out before actually changing the wheel gt Have all the occupants get out The passengers should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier for instance while the wheel is being changed gt Switch off the engine gt Move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever for the auto matic gearbox into position P gt App
157. ers ensure that all the win dows are free of ice snow and misting Please familiarize yourself about how to correctly operate the heating and ventilation systems how to de mist and defrost the windows as well as with the cooling mode FE CAUTION a The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free e g of ice snow or leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle This is not a leak Heating and air conditioning 85 Note a The exhaust air streams out through vents at the rear of the luggage com partment We recommend that you do not smoke in the vehicle when the recirculating air mode is operating since the smoke which is drawn at the evaporator from the interior of the vehicle forms deposits in the evaporator of the air condition ing system This produces a permanent odour when the air conditioning sys tem is operating which can only be eliminated through considerable effort and expense replacement of compressor Air outlets B5J 0536 Fig 94 Air outlet vents N Read and observe H and M on page 85 first Warmed not warmed fresh or cooled air will flow out of the opened air outlet vents according to the setting of the control and the outside atmospheric con ditions The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3 and 4 F
158. es for this period so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified In addition SKODA Service Partners also stock a range of suitable car care products as well as those parts which are subject to natural wear and tear such as tyres batteries bulbs and wiper blades Note The accessories authorized by KODA AUTO a s will be offered by the KODA Partners in all countries where KODA AUTO a s has a sales and service net work This will usually be in the form of a printed catalogue of Original SKODA Accessories in the form of separate printed brochures or in the form of offers for SKODA Genuine Accessories on the SKODA Partner s website 128 General Maintenance Spoiler N Read and observe H on page 127 first The following instructions shall be observed if your new vehicle is equipped with a spoiler fitted to the front bumper in combination with the spoiler on the tailgate gt For safety reasons the vehicle must only ever be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in combination with the associated spoiler on the tailgate gt A spoiler cannot be fitted alone on the front bumper nor in combination with out a spoiler on the tailgate or in combination with an inappropriate spoiler on the tailgate gt We recommend that you consult a KODA Service Partner for any repairs re placement fitting or removal of spoilers E WARNING Work not properly performed on the spoilers on your vehicle can result in fault
159. es of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot If the lt symbol appears in the MAXI DOT display this indicates that the tem perature of the automatic DSG gearbox clutches is too high The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Gearbox overheated Stop Log book Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and wait until the lt icon goes out there is a risk of gearbox damage You can continue your journey as soon as the icon disappears H WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 60 d0 Note a Warning messages shown in the MAXI DOT display must be confirmed with button B Fig 24 on page 33 to call up the main menu As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always in dicated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Handbrake 35 Brake system 36 A Seat belt warning light 36 Generator 36 amp Door open 36 w Engine oil 36 Coolant 37 Power steering 38 amp Electronic Stability Control ESC 38 amp Traction Control System ASR 38 Antilock brake system ABS 38 d The rear fog light 39 Bulb failure 39
160. ess and hold button B Fig 22 The following values from the memory selected will be set to zero by button B gt Average fuel consumption gt Distance driven gt Average speed gt Driving time 10 This information is always shown on vehicles with a MAXI DOT display 2 This is not the case on the MAXI DOT display 3 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litre 4 On some models in certain countries the display appears in kilometres litres if the vehicle is station ary 30 Using the system Multifunction display details N Read and observe H on page 29 first Outside temperature The current outside temperature is displayed The temperature is shown with the snowflake symbol if the outdoor tem perature is below 4 C This display flashes for a few seconds then shows the most recently displayed function If the temperature drops below 4 C while the car is driving at a speed faster than 10 km h a beep is also heard Driving time The driving time elapsed since the memory was last erased appears in the dis play Reset the memory to zero by pressing the button page 30 Operation to measure the driving time from a particular moment The maximum time indicated in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes and on vehicles which are fitted with a MAXI DOT display it is 99 hours and 59 mi nutes The indicator is reset to zero when this value is exceeded Cu
161. essential to obtain good visi bility Wiper blades should not be allowed to become dirtied by dust insect re mains and preserving wax Juddering or smearing of the wiper blades could then be due to wax residues left on the windshield by vehicle washing in automatic vehicle wash systems It is therefore important to degrease the lips of the windshield wiper blades after every pass through an automatic vehicle wash system 64 Using the system Replacing the rear window wiper blade Fig 52 Rear window wiper blade A Read and observe H and M on page 62 first Removing the wiper blade gt Raise the wiper arm away from the window Fig 52 gt Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the direction of the wiper arm gt Hold the upper part of the wiper arm and unlock the securing mechanism 1 gt Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow 2 Fitting the wiper blade gt Push the wiper blade in until it latches on the stop gt Check that the wiper blade is correctly attached gt Fold the wiper arm back to the windscreen CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manually dimmed rear view mirror 65 Exterior mirrors 65 E WARNING a Make sure that the mirror is not covered by ice snow condensation or other objects a Convex curved outward or aspheric exterior mirrors increase the field of vision They do however make objects appear smaller in the mirror These
162. f the arrow Fig 35 B Opening the boot lid for vehicles with central locking gt Press the handle and open the tailgate in the direction of the arrow Fig 35 Closing gt Pull down the tailgate and close it with a gentle swing A handle which makes the closing easier is located on the inner panelling of the boot lid Automatic locking of the boot lid N Read and observe H on page 50 first If the boot lid is unlocked with the key symbol on the remote control key then the door is automatically locked after closing The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by a specialist garage After the activation of the delayed locking the door can be opened again after closing within a limited period Delayed locking can be deactivated by a specialist garage at any time EE CAUTION There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked automatically We therefore recommend locking the vehicle with the key sym bol amp on the remote control key Emergency unlocking Fig 36 Emergency unlocking of the boot lid B5J 0260 Ql Read and observe H on page 50 first The boot lid can be unlocked manually if there is a fault in the central locking system Unlocking gt Fold the rear seat backrest forward page 67 Rear seats gt Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim in the direc tion of the arrow 1 Fig 36 as far as
163. f the arrow Fig 58 B and remove the seat squab from its bracket Fitting gt Press the wire loop in the direction of the arrow Fig 58 B and fit it into the bracket gt Fold the seat cushion back into its original position CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Adjusting the head restraints 69 Storing the head restraints in the seat squabs 69 Adjusting the head restraints Fig 59 Head restraint adjusting removing Setting the height gt Grasp the side of the head restraint with both hands and push it upwards as required Fig 59 A gt To move the head restraint downwards press and hold the safety but ton Fig 59 B with one hand and push the head restraint down with the other hand Removing installing gt Pull the head restraint out of the seat backrest as far as the stop gt Press the locking button in the direction of the arrow Fig 59 B and pull the head restraint out gt To re insert the head restraint push it far enough down into the seat back rest until the locking button clicks into place Best protection is achieved if the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of your head The head restraints must be adjusted to match the size of the seat occupant Correctly adjusted head restraints together with the seat belts offer effective protection for the occupants page 7 HU WARNING The
164. f the car Switching on gt Set a temperature between 18 C and 29 C gt Move the air outlet vents 3 Fig 94 on page 86 and 4 so that the air flow is directed slightly upwards gt Press the AUTO button Fig 97 on page 97 AUTO will appear in the display Automatic mode can be switched off by pressing any of the air distribution buttons or by increasing decreasing the blower speed The temperature is nevertheless regulated Setting the temperature Setting temperature gt Switch on the ignition gt Turn the control dial 1 Fig 97 on page 97 to the left or to the right to in crease or decrease the temperature Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit gt Press and hold the AUTO and a c buttons simultaneously The information appears in the display in the desired temperature unit no 3 Fig 97 on page 91 The interior temperature can be set between 18 C and 29 C The interior temperature is regulated automatically within this range If you set the temperature below 18 C LO appears in the display If you set a temperature higher than 29 C HI appears in the display In both end positions the Climatronic operates at maximum cooling or heating capacity No automatic temperature control takes place during this 92 Using the system EE CAUTION Lengthy and uneven distribution of the air flow out of the vents especially around the feet and large differences in temperature
165. first gt Remove the cover in the rear bumper 2 Fig 117 on page 122 in the direc tion of the arrow using the tool for removing the wheel trims gt Pull off the cover for the mounting recess 4 Fig 117 on page 122 in the di rection of the arrow H gt Adjust the ball head to the ready position page 122 gt Grip the tow bar from underneath Fig 120 and insert into the mounting re cess until you hear it click into place H Lever 1 Fig 120 automatically turns upwards and the release pin 2 pops out its red and green parts are visible H If the lever 1 does not turn automatically or if the release pin 2 does not pop out remove the ball head from the mounting recess by turning the lever downwards as far as it can go Clean the tapered surfaces on the ball head and the mounting recess gt Lock the lock on the operating lever by turning the key by 180 to the right see green marking 3 is visible and remove the key in the direction of the arrow gt Push cap 4 Fig 120 onto the lock in the direction of the arrow M gt Check the ball head for secure mounting page 123 E WARNING a Carefully remove the cap for the mounting recess there is a risk of hand injury Keep your hands outside the lever s range of motion when attaching the ball head there is a risk of finger injury Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the key Doing so would
166. from SKODA Original Accessories Decrease volume Fitting gt First push adapter A in the direction of the arrow Fig 99 into the mount as far as the stop Then press the adapter slightly downwards until it locks securely into position gt Insert the mobile phone into the adapter A as specified in the instructions from the manufacturer of the adapter Removing gt Press the side locks on the mount Fig 99 at the same time and remove the adapter with the mobile phone Communication and multimedia 95 EE CAUTION Taking the mobile phone out of the adapter during the call can lead to inter ruption of the connection When removing the mobile phone the connection to the factory fitted antenna is interrupted which reduces the quality of the transmitting and receiving signal The charging of the mobile phone battery is also interrupted Managing telephone calls with the help of the adapter Fig 100 Principle sketch Adapter with one button adapter with two but tons Function overview of the 4 Fig 100 PTT push to talk button on the adapter gt Switch on off voice control gt Accept end a call Some adapters include the button A Fig 100 in addition to the but ton After pressing this button for 2 seconds the number 112 Emergency call is dialled Connecting the mobile phone to the hands free system To connect a mobile phone with the hands free system the two devices must be
167. from the driver s view Assist systems 119 If after stopping the car the message UNABLE TO START STOP appears in the segment display or in the MAXI DOT display the check mark J Fig 115 then the conditions for automatic engine shutdown are not met Running the engine is essential for example for the following reasons gt The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet been reached gt The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low gt The current consumption is too high gt High air conditioning or heating capacity high fan speed big difference be tween the desired and actual indoor temperature Note a f the vehicle remains outdoors for a long time in minus temperatures or in direct sunlight it can take several hours until the internal temperature of the vehicle battery reaches a suitable temperature for proper operation of the START STOP system a f the driver s seat belt is removed for more than approx 30 seconds or the driver s door is opened during stop mode the engine will have to be started manually After manual engine start the automatic engine shutdown can take place only when a minimum distance required for the system function has been cov ered Operation N Read and observe H on page 119 first In compliance with the operating conditions automatic engine shutdown au tomatic engine start takes place as described Automatic engine shut down gt Stop th
168. ft pedal of the bicycle forward in order to attach the front wheel more easily gt Undo bolt A Fig 74 on page 76 and push the bicycle carrier to the left to gether with the mounted bicycle to prevent a collision between the handle bars and the side window of the luggage compartment gt Carefully guide the boot lid downwards without letting go of it Check wheth er there is sufficient room between the steering bars and the rear window If necessary adjust the position of the movable part of the bicycle carrier to prevent a collision page 76 gt It is best to store the removed front wheel between the left crank and the bicycle frame attach it with a strap to the front fork Fig 75 B or to one of the fixing points gt The second carrier is installed and the bicycle is secured in a similar way Secure the stability of the bicycles with a belt Fig 76 Securing bicycles I Read and observe H and on page 76 first gt To slacken the rubber part of the clamp push both parts against each other and open the clamp gt Position the clamp with the rubber part to the front in direction of travel as low down on the seat post as possible and lock it Fig 76 A gt When transporting two bicycles stretch the belt Fig 76 A between the saddles by moving the bicycles apart gt Hook the carabiners on the ends of the belt into the lashing eyes behind the rear seats Fig 76 B gt Pull the belt
169. g 57 Fog lights 58 Foglights with the CORNER function 59 Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function 58 Hazard warning light system 60 Low beam lights 56 Main beam lights 58 Parking lights 56 60 Rear fog light 59 Replacing bulbs 169 Switching on and off 56 Tourist lights 59 Turn signals 58 warning lights 35 Lock Central locking system 47 Locking Emergency locking 45 Remote control 48 without central locking 45 Locking and unlocking from the inside _ _ 47 Low beam lights 56 Luggage compartment Class N1 vehicles 70 Lighting 61 Retractable luggage compartment cover Fabia Estate 72 Variable loading floor 73 M Main beam 58 Maintenance 112 Decorative films 132 Manual air conditioning Recirculated air mode 90 Manual gear changing see Gear changing 105 MAXI DOT Main menu 33 see MAXI DOT display 33 Settings 34 MAXI DOT display 33 maximum allowable weights 175 Maximum speed 178 Index 187 MDI Mirror Exterior mirrors Manually dimmed rear view mirror 101 65 62 Vanity Mobile phone Connecting to the hands free system Modes of the automatic transmission Modifications Multifunction display Functions Memory Operation Multimedia N N1 nameplate Net partition 93 96 106 127 29 30 99 Behind
170. g _ 18 es Rs 4 3 5 35 Door opening lever Switch depending on equipment fitted gt Boot lid remote release gt Interior monitor Light switch and headlamp beam adjustment Fuse box in the dashboard Bonnet release lever Lever for adjusting the steering wheel Ignition lock Pedals Depending on equipment fitted gt Gearshift lever manual gearbox gt Selector lever automatic gearbox Rocker switch for front left seat heating Central locking system Handbrake Rocker switch for front right seat heating Depending on equipment fitted gt Ashtrays gt Storage compartment Depending on equipment fitted gt Radio gt Navigation system MDI Note 44 51 50 56 57 167 140 103 105 105 106 67 47 105 67 79 83 101 The layout of the controls on right hand drive vehicles differs partially from that shown in Fig 18 The symbols on the controls and switches are the same as for left hand drive models Cockpit 25 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Overview Engine revolutions counter Speedometer Coolant temperature gauge display Fuel gauge Counter for distance driven Digital clock Display of the second speed Recommended gear Fault display The Error message will appear in the display if there is a fault in the
171. ge is and the limitation it is placing on the brak ing efficiency TE CAUTION a All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by the manufac turer to ensure the brake assist systems operate correctly Changes to the vehicle e g to the engine brakes chassis can influence the functionality of the brake assist systems page 127 Services modifications and technical alterations a f a fault occurs in the ABS system the ESC TCS and EDL will also fail to work An ABS fault is indicated with by the warning light page 38 Stabilisation control ESC A Read and observe H and on page 115 first The ESC system helps to maintain control of the vehicle in situations where it is being operated at its dynamic limits such as a sudden change to the direc tion of travel Depending on the road surface conditions the risk of skidding is reduced thereby improving the vehicle s driving stability The ESC system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on The direction which the driver wishes to take is determined based on the steering angle and the speed of the vehicle and is constantly compared with the actual behaviour of the vehicle If differences exist such as the car begin ning to skid the ESC system will automatically brake the appropriate wheel During an intervention of the system the warning light amp flashes in the instru ment cluster The following systems are integrated in
172. ge is shown in the MAXI DOT display Oil pressure Engine off Log book The warning light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition is switch ed on Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the engine oil lev el page 143 Even if the oil level is correct do not drive any further if the warning light is flashing Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed Seek help from a specialist garage The warning light lights up yellow oil quantity too low The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check oil level Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the engine oil lev el page 143 An audible signal sounds as a warning signal The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec onds If no engine oil has been replenished the warning light will come on again after driving about 100 km The warning light flashes yellow engine oil level sensor faulty The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Oil sensor workshop If the engine oil level sensor is faulty the warning light flashes several times and an audible signal sounds when the ignition is turned on Seek help from a specialist garage E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights system page 60 EE CAUTION The red oi
173. gine con trol page 150 Automatic load deactivation Sun visors Fig 49 Sun visor swivelling out 62 Using the system The sun visor for the driver or front passenger can be pulled out of the fixture and swivelled towards the door in the direction of arrow 1 Fig 49 The vanity mirrors in the sun visors are provided with covers Push the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 The purpose of the strap A is to store small light objects such as a notepad etc H WARNING The sun visors must not be swivelled towards the side windows in the de ployment area of the head airbags if any objects such as ball point pens etc are attached to them This might result in injuries to the occupants if the head airbag is deployed CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Windscreen wiper and washer 63 Headlight cleaning system 63 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 64 Replacing the rear window wiper blade 64 The windscreen wipers and the windscreen washer system only operate when the ignition is switched on The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on when reverse gear is selected Top up with windscreen wiper fluid page 141 H WARNING Properly maintained windscreen wiper blades are essential for clear visi bility and safe driving page 64 Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without heating
174. gnition Engine parts could be significantly damaged We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage a Water which has collected in the fuel filter can cause engine faults CAUTION a The vehicle cannot be operated with biofuel RME therefore this fuel must not be filled in the tank and used for driving the vehicle The use of biofuel RME can cause considerable damage to parts of the engine or fuel system Do not mix any fuel additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar agents into the diesel This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the exhaust system CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening and closing the bonnet 140 Engine compartment overview 141 Radiator fan 141 Windscreen washer system 141 H WARNING When working in the engine compartment injuries scalding accident or fire hazards may arise For this reason it is essential to comply with the warning instructions stated below and with the generally applicable rules of safety The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area E WARNING Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment Turn off the engine and withdraw the ignition key Firmly apply the handbrake a If the vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox move the gearshift lever in to Neutral or if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox move the sel
175. gnition switched off light switched off light switch in position 0 control dial for headlamp beam adjustment in the position no gear engaged or selector lever in the N position automatic gearbox tourist light deactivated gt Switch on the ignition Within 10 seconds of the ignition being switched on gt Turn the light switch to the 20 position page 56 Parking and low beam lights gt Engage reverse gear manual gearbox or move the selector lever to the R position automatic gearbox gt Turn the headlamp beam adjustment dial from to 3 page 57 Deactivating tourist light Before deactivating the tourist light the following conditions must be met Ignition switched off light switched off light switch in position 0 control dial for headlamp beam adjustment in the 3 position no gear engaged or selector lever in the N position automatic gearbox tourist light activated gt Switch on the ignition Within 10 seconds of the ignition being switched on gt Turn the light switch to the 20 position page 56 Parking and low beam lights gt Engage reverse gear manual gearbox or move the selector lever to the R position automatic gearbox gt Turn the headlamp beam adjustment dial from 3 to page 57 Lights and visibility 59 Further information page 114 Headlights EF Note When the tourist light mode is active the warning light flashes for 10 sec onds each time the ignitio
176. gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 2 Fig 12 OFF gt Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch W gt Close the passenger door gt Check whether the 3 OFF 2 warning light in the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3 mes sage in the centre of the dash panel lights up after the ignition has been switched on Switching on gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the passenger door gt Fold the key bit out completely for the radio key H gt Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop gt Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch into position 1 Fig 12 ON gt Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch J gt Close the passenger door gt Check whether the 3 OFF 3 warning light in the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3 mes sage in the centre of the dash panel does not light up after the ignition is switched on H WARNING a The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch ed off Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off Otherwise a fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag a f the OFF warning light flashes the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident Have the airbag system checked by a specialist garage immediately The key cannot be inserted in the key switch while driving Shocks can cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the
177. guisher 157 Vehicle tool kit 158 First aid kit and warning triangle n rrara Fig 138 Placing of the warning triangle B5J 0381 A warning triangle with the maximum dimensions 39 x 68 x 450 mm can be attached to the trim panel of the rear wall with rubber straps Fig 138 E WARNING The first aid kit and warning triangle must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants EF Note Pay attention to the expiration date of the first aid kit We recommend using a first aid box from SKODA Original Accessories availa ble from a SKODA Partner Fire extinguisher Fig 139 Fire extinguisher B5J 0594 The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the driver s seat Removing attaching gt Loosen the two straps by pulling the buckles in the direction of the ar row Fig 139 gt Remove the fire extinguisher It is attached in the reverse order Please read carefully the instructions which are attached to the fire extin guisher The fire extinguisher must be checked by an authorised person once a year National legal requirements must be observed H WARNING The fire extinguisher must always be secured safely so that they do not come loose when making an emergency braking or in a vehicle collision which could cause injuries to occupants FF Note a The fire extinguis
178. he START STOP system Fig 147 Engine earth START STOP sys tem QO Read and observe H and H on page 164 first On vehicles with the START STOP system the jump start cable of the charger must never be connected directly to the negative pole of the vehicle battery but only to the engine earth Fig 147 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front towing eye 166 Rear towing eye 166 Vehicles with a tow hitch 166 Vehicles with manual transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front or rear wheels raised Vehicles with automatic transmission may be towed in with a tow bar or a tow rope or with the front wheels raised If the vehicle is raised at rear the auto matic gearbox is damaged A tow bar is the safest way of towing a vehicle and also minimises any shocks Only use a tow rope if a suitable tow bar is not available The following guidelines must be observed when towing Driver of the tow vehicle gt Release the clutch particularly gently when starting off or depress the accel erator particularly gently if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox gt On vehicles with a manual transmission only push down on the accelerator pedal once the rope is taught The maximum towing speed is 50 km h Driver of the towed vehicle gt Switch on the ignition so that the steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights hor
179. he electrical system first of all disconnect the negative terminal of the battery followed by the positive terminal a When connecting the battery to the electrical system first of all connect the positive terminal of the battery followed by the negative terminal Under no circumstances must the battery cables be connected incorrectly risk of a cable fire Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork there is a risk of damage to the paintwork Do not place the battery in direct daylight in order to protect the vehicle bat tery housing from the effects of ultra violet light a f the vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 to 4 weeks the battery will discharge This is because certain electrical components consume electricity e g control units also in idle state Prevent the battery from discharging by disconnecting the battery s negative terminal or continuously charging the battery with a very low charging current a f the vehicle is frequently used for making short trips the vehicle battery will not have time to charge up sufficiently and may discharge For the sake of the environment A vehicle battery that has been removed is a special type of hazardous waste These must be disposed of in accordance with national legal regulations Note You should replace batteries older than 5 years Open cover Fig 131 Plastic cover of the vehicle bat tery 148 General Main
180. he engine has higher internal friction than later until all of the moving parts have harmonized The driving style which you adopt during the first approx 1 500 kilometres plays a decisive part in the suc cess of running in your car Never drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds even after the running in pe riod On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox at the very latest shift up into the next gear when the red area is reached Observe the recommended gear page 28 Recommended gear Very high engine speeds when accelerat ing accelerator are automatically restricted M In vehicles with manual transmission do not drive at unnecessarily low engine speeds Shift down a gear when the engine is no longer running smoothly Ob serve the recommended gear page 28 Recommended gear TE CAUTION The engine is not protected from excessive engine revs caused by shifting down at the wrong time This can result in a sudden increase in revs beyond the permissible maximum rpm and hence engine damage Never rev up a cold engine when the vehicle is stationary or when driving in individual gears For the sake of the environment Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine speeds Shifting up sooner helps save fuel reduces engine noise and protects the environment Starting off and Driving 109 New tyres New tyres have to be run in since they do not offer optimal grip at first Drive especially carefully for the first 500 km o
181. he mode selected by means of button 5 Fuel gauge page 27 Engine revolutions counter N Read and observe H on page 26 first The red scale of the rev counter 1 Fig 19 on page 26 indicates the range in which the engine control unit begins to limit the engine speed The engine control unit restricts the engine speed to a steady limit You should shift into the next higher gear before the red scale of the revolu tion counter is reached or move the selector lever into position D if your car is fitted with an automatic gearbox To maintain the optimum motor speed observe the gearshift indica tor page 28 For the sake of the environment Shifting up in good time has the following benefits It helps to reduce fuel consumption a t reduces engine noise a It protects the environment a It benefits the service life and reliability of the engine Speedometer AN Read and observe H on page 26 first Warning against speeding An audible warning signal will sound when the vehicle speed exceeds 120 km h2 The audible warning is switched off once the vehicle speed falls below 120 km h 1 Applies for vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 2 This function is only enabled in certain countries Coolant temperature gauge display AN Read and observe H on page 26 first The coolant temperature gauge 4 Fig 19 on page 26 operates only when the ignition is switched on In vehicles with a segment display the co
182. he remote control is automatically deactivated when the ignition is switch ed on Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interference from transmitters close to the car operating in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter The battery must be replaced if the central locking or anti theft alarm system does react to the remote control at less than 3 metres away page 43 a f the driver door is open the vehicle cannot be locked using the remote con trol key Unlocking locking Fig 33 Remote control key Unlocking the vehicle 3 gt Press button 1 Fig 33 Locking the vehicle amp gt Press button 3 Fig 33 Deactivating the safe securing system gt Press button 3 Fig 33 twice within 2 seconds Further informa tion page 45 Unlocking the boot lid lt gt Press button 2 Fig 33 Further information page 51 Folding out the key bit gt Press button 4 Fig 33 Folding in the key bit gt Press the button 4 Fig 33 and fold in the key bit Unlocking The turn signal lights flash twice as confirmation that the vehicle has been un locked If the vehicle is unlocked using button 1 Fig 33 and none of the doors or the tailgate are opened within the next 30 seconds the vehicle is au tomatically locked again and the safe securing system or anti theft alarm sys tem is reactivated This function is intended to prevent the car being un
183. he respective door gt If at least one door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked gt In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed the locked doors are automatically unlocked in order to enable rescuers to gain access to the vehicle WARNING Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency danger to life f the safelock system is switched on page 46 the door opening lever and the central locking buttons do not operate CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unlocking locking 48 Synchronization 49 You can use the remote control key to gt unlock and lock the vehicle gt unlocking boot lid gt open and close the windows page 53 Window convenience operation The transmitter with the battery is housed in the handle of the remote control key The receiver is located in the interior of the vehicle The operating range of the remote control key is approx 30 m But this range of the remote control can be reduced if the batteries are weak The key has a fold open key bit which can be used for unlocking and locking the car manually and also for starting the engine The system must be initialised by a specialist garage if a lost key is replaced or if the receiver unit has been repaired or replaced Only then can the remote control key be used again 48 Using the system FF Note T
184. he vehicle page 178 Vehicle specific details according to engine type Payload It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference between the permissible total weight and the operating weight The payload consists of the following weights gt The weight of the passengers gt The weight of all items of luggage and other loads gt The weight of the roof including the roof rack system gt The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight gt Trailer drawbar load when towing a trailer max 50 kg Note If required you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle by contacting a specialist garage measurement of fuel consumption and CO emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives The data on fuel consumption and CO 2 emissions were not available at the time of going to press The data on fuel consumption and CO gt emissions are given on the KODA websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation The measurement of the intra urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en gine Afterwards urban driving is simulated In the extra urban driving cycle the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in all gears corresponding to daily routine driving conditions The driving speed varies between 0 and 120 km h The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of about 37 for the intra urban cycle and 63 for the extra
185. head restraints must be correctly adjusted in order to offer effective protection for the occupants in the event of an accident Never drive with the head restraints removed there is a risk of injury a f the rear seats are occupied the rear head restraint must not be in the lower position Storing the head restraints in the seat squabs Rear seats Inserting head re straints in the seat cushions P B5J 0286 The rear head restraints can be inserted into the corresponding holes in the folded seat squabs Fig 60 CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Class N1 vehicles 70 Fastening elements 70 Folding hooks 71 Fixing nets 71 Boot cover 71 Further positions of the luggage compartment cover 72 Retractable luggage compartment cover Fabia Estate 72 Please observe the following for the purpose of maintaining good handling characteristics of your vehicle gt Distribute loads as evenly as possible gt Place heavy objects as far forward as possible gt Attach the items of luggage to the lashing eyes or using the fixing net page 70 In the event of an accident even small and light objects gain so much kinetic energy that they can cause severe injuries The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object Seats and storage 69 Example In the event of a frontal collis
186. hen one releases the button The window will also open fully automatically if you briefly press the button as far as the stop Renewed pressing of the button causes the window to stop immediately Closing gt The window is closed by pulling lightly on the relevant button The closing process stops when one releases the button The window will also close fully automatically if you briefly pull the button as far as the stop Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop im mediately Safety pushbutton The buttons for power windows in the rear doors can be deactivated by press ing the safety switch S Fig 37 The buttons for the electrical power win dows in rear doors are activated again by pressing the safety pushbutton S again If the buttons for the rear doors are deactivated the warning light amp in the safety switch S lights up Note The window lift mechanism is equipped with protection against overheating Repeated opening and closing of the window can cause this mechanism to overheat If this happens it will not be possible to operate the window for a short time You will be able to operate the window again as soon as the over heating protection has cooled down Power window force limiter A Read and observe H and on page 52 first The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter It reduces the risk of bruises or injuries when closing the windows If there is an obstacle the clo
187. her must comply with national legal requirements Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher Proper function ing of the fire extinguisher is not assured once it has passed its expiry date The fire extinguisher is part of the scope of delivery in certain countries only Emergency equipment and self help 157 Vehicle tool kit B5J 0587 Fig 140 Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit and the jack are housed in a plastic box in the spare wheel or in the storage space for the spare wheel There is also space here for the removable ball rod for the trailer towing device The box is attached with a strap on the spare wheel The components of the vehicle tool kit depending on equipment Fig 140 Screwdriver Adapter for anti theft wheel bolts Towing eye Clamps for removing the wheel trims Car jack Wheel brace Tool for removing wheel bolt caps Replacement bulb set o gt Nee N Screw the car jack back to its initial position after use to store it back in the box with the vehicle tool kit 158 Do it yourself HU WARNING The factory supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehicle Under no circumstances attempt to lift heavier vehicles or other loads there is a risk of injury a Ensure that the vehicle tool kit is safely secured in the boot a Ensure that the box is always secured with the strap CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the fol
188. hicle dimensions Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle key Vehicle status see Auto Check Control Vehicle tool kit Visors W Warning lights Warning symbols see warning lights Warning triangle Washing Automatic car wash system by hand Chrome parts High pressure cleaner 150 149 148 148 149 148 149 146 135 133 132 135 131 131 135 135 133 130 131 175 177 175 A2 34 158 62 35 35 157 127 130 129 131 130 Water Driving through 113 Waxing See Vehicle care 131 Wheel bolts Anti theft wheel bolt 161 Caps 155 Loosening and tightening 160 Wheels Back up wheel 154 Bolts 156 Changing 158 Full trim 155 General information 150 Load index 153 Snow chains 156 Spare wheel 154 Speed symbol 153 Storing wheels 152 Swapping wheels around 152 Tyre pressure 152 Tyre service life 152 Tyre wear indicator 152 Unidirectional tyres 153 Wheel sizes 152 Winter tyres 156 Window convenience operation 53 Windows 132 Deicing 132 See Electrical power windows 51 Window wipers Replacing the rear window wiper blade 64 Windscreen Deicing 132 Windscreen washer fluid Checking 141 Replenishing 141 Warning light 41 Winter 141 Windscreen washer system 141 Windscreen wash system Windscreen washer 63 Windscreen wiper Operate 63
189. ia RS foglights gt m2 Changing the licence plate light bulb 173 Rear light 173 Some manual skills are required to change a bulb For this reason if uncertain we recommend that bulbs are replaced by a specialist garage or other expert help is sought gt Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb gt Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs The designa tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb gt A stowage compartment for replacement bulbs is located in a plastic box in the spare wheel or underneath the floor covering in the boot Fuses and light bulbs 169 H WARNING Headlights Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 139 a Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficul ty by other road users a Bulbs H7 and H4 are pressurised and may burst when changed there is a risk of injury We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety glasses when changing a bulb Switch off the respective vehicle light when changing the bulb AE CAUTION Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers even the smallest Fig 154 Bulb arrangement Halogen headlights halogen projector head amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb Use a clean cloth lights napkin or similar a When
190. ialogue The period of time during which the system is ready to receive voice com mands and to carry them out is called a dialogue The system gives audible feedback and guides you if necessary through the relevant functions 1 On vehicles fitted with the Amundsen navigation system this function can be accessed via the naviga tion system menu refer to the Operating instructions for the Amundsent navigation system 98 Using the system Optimum understanding of the voice commands depends on several factors gt Speak with a normal tone of voice without intonation and excessive pauses gt Avoid a bad pronunciation gt Close the doors windows and sliding roof to reduce or stop disturbing exte rior noise gt It is recommended to speak louder at higher speeds so that the tone of your voice is louder than the increased surrounding noise gt During the dialogue limit additional noise in the vehicle e g passengers talk ing at the same time gt Do not speak if the system makes an announcement The microphone for voice control is inserted in the moulded headliner and di rected to the driver and front passenger Therefore the driver and the front passenger can operate the equipment Entering a phone number The telephone number can be entered as a continuous series of individually spoken digits the whole number at once or in the form of digital blocks sepa rated by short pauses After each order of digits separatio
191. if they are not used There fore we recommend that you do not use summer or winter tyres that are older than 6 years or 4 years respectively New tyres N Read and observe H and on page 150 first Only fit radial tyres of the same type size rolling circumference and the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels The tyre wheel combinations which are approved for your vehicle are indica ted in your vehicle documents Where possible replace tyres by axle Always fit the tyres with the deeper tread depth to the front wheels Explanation of tyre markings 185 65 R14 86 T What this means is Tyre width in mm Fig 133 on page 152 B Height width ratio in Fig 133 on page 152 B Code letter for the type of tyre Radial Fig 133 on page 152 B Diameter of wheel in inches Fig 133 on page 152 B Load index Speed symbol H The date of manufacture is stated on the tyre wall possibly on the inside e g DOT 1114 means for example that the tyre was manufactured in the 11th week of 2014 Load index This indicates the maximum permissible load on each individual tyre 83 487kg 85 515kg 86 530kg 87 545kg 91 615kg 92 630kg 93 650kg Speed symbol This indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fitted with tyres in the category concerned 170 km h 180 km h 190 km h 200 km h 210 km h 240
192. ig 94 and the outlets can also be opened and closed individually Open the air outlet vents 3 and 4 gt Turn the vertical wheel air vents 3 Fig 94 or the horizontal wheel air out let nozzles 4 to the 4 position 86 Using the system Close air outlet vents 3 and 4 gt Turn the vertical wheel air vents 3 Fig 94 or the horizontal wheel air out let nozzles 4 to the O position Change air flow of air outlet vents 3 and 4 gt In order to change the strength of the air flow swivel the horizontal lamellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster Fig 94 gt In order to change the lateral direction of the air flow swivel the vertical la mellas with the aid of the moveable adjuster Set the air supply to the individual vents with the air distribution control Fig 95 on page 87 FF Note Do not cover the air outlet vents with objects of any kind Using the air conditioning system economically N Read and observe H and H on page 85 first The air conditioning system compressor uses power from the engine when in cooling mode which will affect the fuel consumption It recommended to open the windows or the doors of a vehicle for which the interior has been strongly heated through the effect of direct sunlight in order to allow the heated air to escape The cooling system should not be switched on if the windows are open For the sake of the environment Pollutant emissions are also lower when fuel is being saved
193. ights gt Release the turn signal stalk Activating on vehicles with the START STOP system gt Switch off the ignition gt At the same time pull the turn signal light stalk Fig 42 on page 58 to wards the steering wheel push it upwards and hold it in this position gt Switch on the ignition wait until the right turn signal light flashes 4x gt Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which confirms the activa tion of the daylight driving lights gt Release the turn signal stalk On vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the fog lights or in the front bumper the parking lights and the licence plate light do not come on when activating the function daylight driving lights neither front nor rear If the vehicle is not equipped with separate lights for daylight driving lights the combination of the low beam the parking lights front and rear including the licence plate light is used as daylight driving lights FJ Note In vehicles with separate lights for daylight driving lights in the bumper below the main headlights these lights also serve as side lights Lights and visibility 57 Turn signal and main beam lights Fig 42 Stalk turn signal and main beam operation sey PN k B VANN D N Read and observe H on page 56 first The parking light is controlled with the control stalk page 60 Control stalk positions Fig 42 A Switch on right turn signa
194. ights up gt Press the button again The indicator light in the button goes out 90 Using the system Recirculated air mode is switched off automatically if the air distribution con trol C Fig 96 on page 89 is turned to the position Recirculated air mode can be switched on again from this setting by pressing the button again U WARNING Never leave recirculated air mode on over a longer period as stale air can cause fatigue in the driver and the passengers reduce attention levels and also cause the windows to mist up The risk of having an accident increa ses Switch off recirculated air mode as soon as the windows start to mist up This chapter contains information on the following subjects Control elements 91 Automatic mode 92 Setting the temperature 92 Recirculated air mode 92 Controlling the blower 92 CLIMATRONIC Defrosting windscreen 93 mx O S Climatronic in automatic mode ensures the best possible setting of the tem perature of the outflowing air the blower stage and air distribution B5J 0597 The system also takes sunlight into account which eliminates the need to al ter the settings manually Fig 97 Climatronic Control elements The cooling system operates only if the following conditions are met The buttons control dial v The cooling system is switched on page 91 1 Setting the interior temperature page 92 v The engine is running Displ
195. ine code 4 Partial vehicle description Type plate The type plate Fig 164 B is located at the bottom of the B pillar on the right driver s side The type plate contains the following data 5 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Maximum permissible gross weight Maximum permissible towed weight towing vehicle and trailer Maximum permissible front axle load 9 Maximum permissible rear axle load Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number VIN vehicle body number is stamped on the right hand suspension strut dome in the engine compartment This num ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen together with a VIN bar code together with a nameplate Engine number The engine number three digit code letter and serial number is stamped onto the engine block H WARNING Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights there is the risk of an accident and damage Operating weight and payload Operating weight This value represents the minimum operating weight without additional weight increasing equipment such as air conditioning system spare wheel or trailer hitch The specified operating weight is for orientation purposes only Technical data 175 The operating weight also contains the weight of the driver 75 kg the weight of the operating fluids the tool kit and a fuel tank filled to 90 capacity Operating weight of t
196. ine oil level Fig 128 Checking the oil level Ensure that the vehicle is positioned on a level surface and the engine has reached its operating temperature gt Switch off the engine Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the sump gt Open the bonnet gt Pull out the dipstick gt Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again to the stop gt Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level Oil level within range A No oil must be refilled Oil level within range Oil can be refilled The oil level may lie in range A Oil level within range The engine must be topped up with oil so that the oil level at least reaches range B The engine burns some oil The oil consumption may be as much as 0 5 I 1000 km depending on your style of driving and the conditions under which you operate your vehicle Consumption may be slightly higher than this during the first 5 000 kilometres The oil level must be checked at regular intervals We recommend it be checked after each time you refuel or prior to making a long journey Inspecting and replenishing 143 We recommend maintaining the oil level within the range A but not above if the engine has been operating at high loads for example during a lengthy motorway trip during the summer months towing a trailer or negotiating a high mountain pass The warning light in the instrument cluster will indicate whether the oil level is too low
197. ing 60 Storage compartments 81 Compartments 81 Computer see Multifunction display 29 Convenience turn signal 58 Coolant 144 Checking 145 Display messages 37 Replenishing 145 Warning light 37 Coolant temperature gauge display 27 Correct seated position 7 Driver 7 Front passenger 8 Notes 9 Rear seats 9 Counter for distance driven 28 Cruise control system 118 Cupholders 79 D DAY LIGHT see Daylight running lights 57 Daylight running lights 57 Index 185 De icing rear window Deactivating airbags 62 18 Decorative films Delayed locking of the boot lid see boot lid 132 51 Diesel refer to Fuel Diesel fuel Operation in winter Diesel particulate filter display messages Digital clock Dipstick Display Service interval Distance driven Door Child safety lock Closing Indicator light for an open door Opening Doors Emergency locking driving emissions fuel consumption Driving Abroad Driving through water on streets Maximum speed Driving economically Economical gear changing Driving through water E Economical and environmentally friendly driv ing 186 Index 138 138 39 39 28 143 32 28 44 44 36 44 45 176 176 114 113 178 T10 113 T10 Economical driving Anti
198. ing and installing carrier rails 74 The variable loading floor makes handling of bulky items of luggage easier AE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg EF Note The room under the variable loading floor can be used to stow objects Dividing up the luggage compartment with variable loading floor Fig 67 Dividing the boot with variable loading floor gt Lift up the part with the grip and secure it by sliding it into the grooves marked with the arrows Fig 67 Removing and refitting the variable loading floor i l Jj Naa 998535 0 Fig 68 Fold up variable loading floor remove A Read and observe M on page 73 first Removing gt Unlock the variable loading floor by turning the securing bolts A around 180 anticlockwise Fig 68 gt Fold up the loading floor by moving it in the direction of the arrow B gt Fold up the variable loading floor in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 68 and remove by pulling in the direction of the arrow 2 Fitting gt Fold up the variable loading floor and place it on the carrier rails gt Fold out the variable loading floor gt Lock the variable loading floor by turning the locking bolt A to the right by approx 180 EN WARNING Ensure that the carrier rails and variable loading floor are correctly fastened when fitting the variable loading floor If this is not the case there is a risk of injury for the occupa
199. ing of the air bag system there is a risk of accident and fatal injury Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Washing byhand __ RY Automatic car wash systems 130 Washing with a high pressure cleaner 130 The best protection for your vehicle against harmful environmental influences is frequent washing How often the vehicle should be washed depends for example on the follow ing factors gt Frequency of use gt Parking situation garage under trees etc gt Season of the year gt Weather conditions gt Environmental influences The longer insect residues bird droppings tree sap road and industrial dust tar soot particles road salt and other aggressive deposits remain adhering to the paintwork of your vehicle the more detrimental their destructive effect can be High temperatures such as those caused by intensive sun s rays ac centuate this caustic effect It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end of the winter E WARNING Washing your vehicle in the winter water and ice in the brake system can affect the braking efficiency there is the risk of an accident Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is switched off there is the risk of an accident CAUTION Do not wash your vehicle in bright sunlight there is a risk of paint damage For
200. instru ment cluster Ensure that the fault is rectified as soon as possible by a special ist workshop H WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully responsible for road safety Never operate the controls in the instrument cluster while driving only when the vehicle is stationary 1 Applies for vehicles using the MAXI DOT display 2 Applies for vehicles with a segment display 3 Applies for models in which where the values are indicated in British measuring units 26 Using the system Overview 40 Oe ee x Vminxiao 4 7 40 lt 20 B5J 0591 Fig 19 Instrument cluster I Read and observe H on page 26 first O 2 OES Revolutions counter with warning lights page 27 Display gt With counter for distance driven page 28 gt With service interval display page 32 gt With digital clock page 28 gt With multifunction display MFA page 29 gt With the MAXI DOT display page 33 Speedometer with warning lights page 27 Coolant temperature gauge page 27 Button for display mode gt Setting the hours minutes page 28 gt Enable disable the display of the second speed page 28 gt Service interval Display of the number of days kilometres or miles re maining until the next Service page 32 6 Button for gt Reset daily trip counter page 28 gt Set hours minutes gt Enable disable t
201. ion at a speed of 50 km h an object weighing 4 5 kg produces energy corresponding to 20 times its own weight This means that it results in a weight of approx 90 kg WARNING Store the objects in the boot and attach them to the lashing eyes Loose objects can be thrown forward during a sudden manoeuvre or in case of an accident and can injure the occupants or other road users Loose objects could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants there is a risk of death a Please note that the handling properties of the vehicle may be affected when transporting heavy objects as the centre of gravity can be shifted there is a risk of an accident The speed and style of driving must be adjus ted accordingly a If the items of luggage or objects are attached to the lashing eyes with unsuitable or damaged lashing straps injuries can occur in the event of braking manoeuvres or accidents To prevent items of luggage from being thrown forward always use suitable lashing straps which must be firmly at tached to the lashing eyes Items carried in the luggage compartment must be stowed in such a way that no objects are able to slip forward under sudden driving manoeuvres or braking there is a risk of injury When transporting fastened objects which are sharp and dangerous in the boot that has been enlarged by folding the rear seats forward ensure the safety of the passengers transported on the other rear seats page 9 Correct seate
202. ior of the vehicle page 50 gt A drop in voltage of the on board power supply gt Socket of the factory fitted towing device An alarm is immediately triggered if either of the two battery terminals is dis connected while the anti theft alarm system is activated Unlocking and locking 49 How is the alarm switched off The alarm is turned off by pressing the 8 button on the remote control key or switching the ignition on Interior monitor and towing protection Fig 34 Button for interior monitor and towing protection The interior monitor detects movements inside the car and then triggers the alarm Switching off gt Switch off the ignition gt Open the driver door gt Press the Fig 34 button in the driver s door gt Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds The interior monitor and the towing protection are switched on again auto matically the next time the car is locked EI Note Deactivate the interior monitor and the towing protection if there is a possi bility of the alarm being triggered by movements e g by children or animals within the vehicle interior or if the vehicle has to be transported e g by train or ship or towed The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the interior monitor To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor the glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi cle 50 Using the system CQ Intro
203. it for automatic gearbox Headlight cleaning system parking light right side Left low beam headlight range adjustment No Power consumer 1 S contact 2 START STOP air conditioning system 3 Instrument cluster headlamp beam adjustment 4 Control unit for ABS button for START STOP 5 Petrol engine Speed regulating system 6 Reversing light manual gearbox 7 Ignition engine control unit automatic gearbox 8 Brake pedal switch clutch pedal switch Operating controls for the heating control unit for air conditioning 9 Isystem parking aid control unit for cornering lights radiator fan washing nozzles 10 Windscreen Wiper and Washer System 11 Mirror adjustment 12 Control unit for trailer detection 13 Control unit for automatic gearbox 14 Motor for halogen projector headlights with cornering light function 15 PDA navigation system 16 Electrohydraulic power steering 17 Light switch power supply 18 Mirror heater 19 S contact 20 Alarm 21 Reversing light fog lights with the function CORNER Operating controls for the heating control unit for air conditioning gt gt _ System parking aid mobile phone instrument cluster steering an gle sender ESC vehicle voltage control unit multifunction steering wheel 53 Interior lighting storage compartment and luggage compartment side lights 24 Central control unit 25 Seat heaters 26 Rear window wiper 168 Do it yourse
204. jects Interior lighting version 1 60 Interior lighting version 2 61 Rear interior light 61 Illuminated storage compartment on the passenger side 61 Luggage compartment light 61 Fig 45 Interior lighting version 1 B1Z 0293 Positions of sliding switch A Fig 45 Switch on 0 Switch off middle position Control by the door contact switch The reading lights can be turned on or off by pressing switch B Fig 45 gt If control of the lights by the door contact switch is enabled switch A Fig 45 is in the amp position the light will come on when one of the fol lowing occurs gt The vehicle is unlocked gt One of the doors is opened gt The ignition key is removed If control of the lights by the door contact switch is enabled switch A Fig 45 in the amp position the light will go off when one of the following occurs gt The vehicle is locked gt The ignition is switched on gt About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed If a door remains open or if switch A Fig 45is in the position the interior light goes out after 10 minutes to prevent the vehicle battery from discharging Fig 46 Interior lighting version 2 BNH 0069 Slide switch positions Fig 46 Switch on 0 Switch off Control by the door contact switch middle position The same principles apply for interior lighting version 2 as for page 60 I
205. k in a dusty environment there is a risk of scratching the paintwork Do not apply polish to door seals or window guides If possible do not apply any polish to body surfaces that come into contact with door seals and window guides Plastic parts A Read and observe H and on page 130 first Clean plastic parts with a damp cloth If this method does not clean plastic parts completely use a specific plastic care product CAUTION Do not use polish on plastic parts Rubber seals A Read and observe H and on page 130 first All door seals and window guides are factory treated with a colourless matt varnish layer against a freezing to painted body parts and against road noise Do not treat the door seals or window guides with any cleaning agent CAUTION An additional treatment of the seals can attack their protective coating and road noise may be generated Chrome parts A Read and observe H and on page 130 first First clean the chrome parts with a damp cloth and then polish them with a soft dry cloth If this method does not completely clean chrome parts use a specific chrome care product Carcare 131 EE CAUTION Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment there is a risk of scratching the finish Decorative films N Read and observe H and H on page 130 first Wash the films with a mild soap solution and clean warm water Never use ag gressive cleaning products or chemical solve
206. l gt Switch on left turn signal Switch on high beam spring loaded position 20 D Switch off main beam and headlamp flasher spring loaded position O When the left or right turn signal is on the or gt warning light flashes in the instrument cluster When the high beam or headlight flasher is on the 20 warning light lights up in the instrument cluster Turn signal for changing lanes to flash only briefly move the stalk up or down to the pressure point only and hold it in this position Convenience turn signal If you wish to flash three times only briefly push the stalk to the upper or low er pressure point and release again E WARNING Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will not be dazzled EF Note The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on The headlight flasher can be operated even if the ignition is switched off The turn signal system only operates when the ignition is switched on 58 Using the system a The turn signal is automatically cancelled after negotiating a curve a The warning light flashes at twice its normal rate if a bulb for the turn signal light fails Halogen projector headlights with cornering light function A Read and observe H on page 56 first For a better cornering illumination the halogen projector headlights with cor nering light function are set in the optimal position in line with the vehicle speed and
207. l amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures these must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole um cleaner HE WARNING Safety regulations should be observed when using petroleum cleaner to re move wax there is a risk of fire Wheels A Read and observe H and on page 130 first Wheel rims Also thoroughly wash the wheel rims when washing the vehicle on a regular basis Regularly remove salt and brake dust otherwise the rim material will be at tacked Damage to the paint layer on the wheel rims must be touched up immediately Light alloy wheels After washing thoroughly and treat the wheel rims with a protective product for light alloy wheels Products which cause abrasion must not be used to treat the wheel rims TE CAUTION Severe layers of dirt on the wheels can also result in wheel imbalance This may show itself in the form of a wheel vibration which is transmitted to the steering wheel which in certain circumstances can cause premature wear of the steering This means it is necessary to remove the dirt Underbody protection A Read and observe H and F on page 130 first The underside of your vehicle is protected for life against chemical and me chanical influences Damage to the protective coating cannot be excluded when the vehicle is driven We recommend that you have the protective coating under the body and on the chassis inspected preferably before the b
208. l is switched off and the 4 indicator light is permanently lit if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their seat belts within the next 90 seconds 36 Using the system Further information page 10 i Generator A Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light lights up amp when the engine is running the vehicle battery is not being charged Seek help from a specialist garage The electrical system requires checking U WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights system page 60 EE CAUTION Do not continue driving if the amp warning light coolant system fault lights up in addition to the amp warning light while you are driving Stop the engine there is a risk of engine damage amp Door open Q Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light amp comes on if one or several doors are opened or if the boot lid is opened The warning light comes on even when the ignition is switched off The warn ing light lights up for a maximum of 5 minutes H WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and switch on the hazard warning lights system page 60 w7 7 Engine oil N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light lights up red low oil pressure The following messa
209. l or page 169 Fuses in the engine compartment gt Take the plastic clip out of its fixture in the cover of the fuse box place it on the relevant fuse and pull it out light brown dark brown red blue yellow white green H WARNING Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the engine compartment page 139 EE CAUTION a Never repair fuses or replace them with a fuse of a higher amperage there is a risk of fire This may also cause damage at another part of the elec trical system a Have the electrical system checked as quickly as possible by a specialist ga rage if a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time A blown fuses is recognisable by the molten metal strip Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage FF Note We recommend that you always carry replacement fuses in the vehicle A box of replacement fuses can be purchased from SKODA Original Accessories One fuse may cover several consumers A single consumer may use several fuses Fuses in the dash panel Underside of the dash panel Dis tribution board cover B5J 0522 Fig 151 Schematic representation of the fuse box for vehicles with left hand steering right hand steering A Read and observe H and on page 167 first The fuses are located on the left side of the dash panel behind a cover gt Carefully remove the cover in the direction of the
210. l pressure light is not an oil level indicator One should therefore check the oil level at regular intervals preferably after every refuelling stop 1 The 7 warning light does not light up in vehicles fitted with the MAXI DOT display when the ignition is switched on but only if there is a fault or the engine oil level is too low 2 Not on vehicles with the MAXI DOT display Coolant N Read and observe H on page 35 first The indicator light amp lights up until the engine reaches operating tempera ture Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads If the warning light lights up or flashes either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low An audible signal sounds as a warning tone The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Check engine coolant Log book Stop the vehicle switch off the engine check the level of the cool ant page 145 and refill the coolant if necessary page 145 If the coolant is within the specified range the increased temperature may be caused by an operating problem at the radiator fan Check the fuse for the ra diator fan replace if necessary page 169 Fuses in the engine compartment Do not continue driving if the warning light does not go off even though the coolant level is correct and the fuse for the fan is in working order Seek help from a specialist garage U WARNING If you have to stop for technical re
211. lb into the housing and turn in a clockwise direction to the the stop Note For slackening and tightening the plastic nut use a coin or similar object 174 Do it yourself Technical data CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle identification data 175 Operating weight and payload 175 measurement of fuel consumption and CO emissions according to ECE Regulations and EU Directives 176 Dimensions 177 Vehicle specific details according to engine type 178 The details given in the vehicle s technical documentation always take prece dence over the details in the Owner s Manual The listed performance values were determined without performance reduc ing equipment e g air conditioning system Vehicle identification data SODA AUTO a s XXXXXKXXXXXXXXX NUIBXXXXXXXXXXXXX ST J OPTIONS XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX Fig 164 Vehicle data sticker type plate Vehicle data sticker The vehicle data sticker Fig 164 A is located on the base of the luggage compartment and is also fixed into the service schedule The vehicle data sticker contains the following data 1 Vehicle identification number VIN 2 Vehicle type 3 Gearbox code paint number interior equipment engine output eng
212. lf Low beam on the right Fuses in the engine compartment No Power consumer Glow plugs radiator fan Electrohydraulic power steering ABS or TCS or ESC Radiator fan Automatic gearbox ABS or TCS or ESC Wi wy _ HL Fig 153 Schematic representation of fuse box in engine compartment A Read and observe H and on page 167 first gt Press the securing clips on the fuse box cover together at the same time in the direction of arrow A Fig 152 and remove the cover in the direction of arrow B gt Release the fixtures in the openings C using a flat screwdriver and fold the cover upwards in direction of arrow D Fuse assignment in engine compartment Power consumer Generator Not assigned Interior Electrical auxiliary heating system Interior uly BR Ww No Central control unit Electrical auxiliary heating system FF Note Fuses 1 7 are replaced by a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Headlights 170 Changing the low beam and high beam bulb halogen headlights 170 Changing the low beam and high beam bulb halogen projector headlights 171 Changing the high beam bulb halogen projector headlights 171 Changing the front turn signalbulb gt Tm Changing the front parking light bulb 171 Foglights and daytime running lights 172 Fabia Scout Fab
213. lised If the drawbar load is too low it jeop ardises the performance of the vehicle trailer combination Distribution of the load Distribute the load in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as close to the axle as possible Secure the items from slipping The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the trailer is laden Maintain a particularly low speed if you cannot avoid driving with this combination Tyre pressure Correct the tyre inflation pressure on your vehicle for a full load page 152 Tyre service life Trailer load The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstan ces page 175 Technical data The trailer loads specified apply only to altitudes up to 1 000 metres above mean sea level The engine output falls as altitude increases as does the ability to climb Therefore for every additional 1000 m in height or part the maximum per missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 The towed weight comprises the actual weights of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer The trailer and drawbar load information on the type plate of the towing equipment are merely test data for the towing equipment The vehicle specific values are detailed in the vehicle documents H WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible axle and drawbar load and the maximum permissible total or towed weight of the vehicle and the trailer there i
214. locked unintentionally In addition when the car is unlocked the electrically adjustable seats and ex terior mirrors move into the position assigned to this key The stored setting of driver seat and exterior mirrors is retrieved Locking The turn signal lights flash once to confirm that the vehicle has been correctly locked If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed Note Only operate the remote control when the doors and boot lid are closed and the vehicle is in your line of sight A KODA partner can also activate deactivate the acoustic signals on vehi cles with an anti theft alarm system Synchronization If the vehicle does not unlock when the remote control is pressed the key may not be synchronised This can occur when the buttons on the remote control key are pressed several times outside the operating range of the equipment or if the battery in the remote control key has been replaced Synchronise the key as follows gt Press any button on the remote control key gt Unlock the door with the key within 1 minute of pressing the button CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operation 49 Interior monitor and towing protection 50 The anti theft alarm system increases the level of protection against people seeking to break into the vehicle The system triggers
215. lowing subjects Preparation 159 Changing a wheel 159 Subsequent steps 159 Loosening tightening wheel bolts 160 Raising the vehicle 160 Securing wheels against theft 161 HH WARNING If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance National legal require ments must be observed a Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible a f the vehicle has been retrofitted with tyres which are different from those it was fitted with at the works follow these guidelines page 153 New tyres HE WARNING Notes for vehicle lifting a f the wheel has to be changed on a slope first of all block the opposite wheel with a stone or similar object to prevent the vehicle from unexpect edly rolling away E WARNING Continued Secure the base plate of the lifting jack with suitable means to prevent possible moving A soft and slippery ground under the base plate may move the lifting jack causing the vehicle to fall down It is therefore always nec essary to place the lifting jack on a solid surface or use a wide and stable base Use a non slip base e g a rubber foot mat if the surface is smooth such as cobbled stones tiled floor etc Only attach the lifting jack to the attachment points provided for this pur pose a Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed Nev
216. lts resulting from corrosion may cause a loss of coolant and can con sequently result in major engine damage Do not fill the coolant above the mark A Fig 129 on page 145 We recommend that you visit a specialist garage if a fault causes the engine to overheat otherwise serious engine damage may occur Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating Capacity A Read and observe H and on page 144 first Coolant capacity in litres 1 2 litres 44 kW 55 1 2 1 63 kW TSI 1 2 1 77 kW TSI 1 4 1 63 kW 1 4 1 132 kW TSI 1 6 1 77 kW Filing level 1 2 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF 1 6 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR DPF 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR DPF Checking the coolant level Fig 129 Engine compartment Coolant expansion reservoir A Read and observe H and on page 144 first The coolant expansion bottle is located in the engine compartment Fig 129 1 The coolant capacity is approximately 1 greater on vehicles that are fitted with an auxiliary heater aux iliary heating and ventilation Explanation of graphic Fig 129 A Mark for the maximum coolant level Mark for the lowest permissible level of coolant The coolant level should be kept between the marks A and If the coolant level is above the mark a no coolant may
217. luids e g the antifreeze con tained in the coolant may ignite E WARNING Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run ning a Pay particular attention to moving engine parts e g V ribbed belt alter nator radiator fan and the high voltage ignition unit there is a risk of death Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system a Avoid short circuits in the electrical system particularly on the vehicle s battery a Always make sure that no jewellery loose clothing or long hair can get caught in rotating engine parts there is a risk of death Always remove any jewellery tie back long hair and wear tight fitting clothing before com pleting any work Inspecting and replenishing 139 E WARNING Information for working on the fuel system or the electrical system a Always disconnect the vehicle battery from the electrical system Do not smoke Never work near open flames a Always have a functioning fire extinguisher nearby HE WARNING Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers Keep the working fluids in sealed original containers and safe from peo ple who are not completely independent e g children If you wish to work under the vehicle you must secure the vehicle against rolling away and support it with suitable axle stands the car jack is not suf ficient for this there is a risk of injury Never cover the engine with additional insul
218. ly the handbrake firmly gt Uncouple any trailer gt Remove the vehicle tool kit page 158 and the spare wheel page 154 Spare and back up wheel from the boot Changing a wheel N Read and observe H on page 158 first gt Remove the full wheel trim page 155 or caps page 155 gt First of all slacken the anti theft wheel bolt and then the other wheel bolts page 160 gt Jack up the vehicle until the wheel that needs changing is clear of the ground page 160 gt Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface cloth paper etc gt Remove the wheel carefully gt Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts gt Lower the vehicle gt Tighten the opposite wheel bolts alternately cross wise with the wheel wrench Tighten the anti theft wheel bolt last page 160 gt Reinstall the wheel trim wheel trim cap or the caps Note All bolts must be clean and must turn easily a Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts a When fitting unidirectional tyres ensure that the direction of rotation is cor rect page 153 Unidirectional tyres Subsequent steps AN Read and observe H on page 158 first The following steps must also be performed after changing the wheel gt Stow and attach the replaced wheel in the spare wheel well using a special screw page 154 Spare and back up wheel gt Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the strap
219. m P or N N Neutral Power transmission to the drive wheels is interrupted in this mode D Mode for forwards travel normal programme In mode D the forward gears are automatically changed according to the en gine load accelerator pedal actuation and driving speed S Mode for forwards travel sports programme In mode S the forward gears are shifted automatically up and down at higher engine speeds than in mode D The shiftlock on the selector lever grip must be pressed when moving the se lector lever out of D mode into S mode Releasing selector lever from P or N modes selector lever lock The selector lever is locked in the P and N modes to prevent the forwards trav el mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion The warning light lights up in the instrument cluster page 42 The selector lever is released by depressing the brake pedal while simultane ously pressing the locking button in the selection lever grip The selector lever is not locked when shifted quickly through N e g from R to D This for example helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck e g in a bank of snow The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in position N for more than approximately 2 seconds without the brake pedal being depressed The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds up to 5 km h EF Note If you want to move the selector lever from mode P to mode
220. me or if it drops below the MIN mark ing If the brake fluid level is too low this is indicated by the indicator light page 36 Brake system lighting up in the instrument cluster Changing A Read and observe H and H on page 146 first Brake fluid absorbs moisture Over time it therefore absorbs moisture from the environment Excessive water in the brake fluid may be the cause of corrosion in the brake system The water content lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid The brake fluid must comply with the following standards or specifications gt VW 50114 gt FMVSS 116 DOT4 CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Open cover 148 Checking the battery electrolyte level 148 Charging 149 Replacing AS Disconnecting or reconnecting ASD Automatic load deactivation 150 Warning symbols on the vehicle battery Meaning Always wear eye protection Battery acid is severely caustic Always wear gloves and eye pro tection Keep fire sparks open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the vehicle battery When charging the vehicle battery a highly explosive gas mixture is produced Keep children away from the vehicle battery E WARNING There is a risk of injuries poisoning chemical burns explosions or fire when carrying out any work on the battery and on the electrical system It is essential to comply with the generally applic
221. mean the ball head is not attached correctly EE CAUTION After removing the key always replace the cap on the lock of the operating lever there is a risk of dirt getting into the lock Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely After removing the ball head always place the cap on the mounting recess Remove the cover from the rear bumper with care there is a risk of paint damage to the bumper and the cap FJ Note Store cover 2 and cover 4 Fig 117 on page 122 in a suitable place in the luggage compartment after removing them Check proper fitting Fig 121 Check that the ball head is fitted properly A Read and observe H and H on page 121 first Check that the ball head is fitted properly each time before use Check the following points v Lever 1 is up as far as it goes Fig 121 The release pin 2 is completely exposed both its red and green parts are visible Towing atrailer 123 v The key is removed v The cap 3 is on the lock of the operating lever JV The ball head does not come out of the mounting recess even after heavy shaking E WARNING Do not use the towing equipment unless the ball head was properly locked Removing the ball head B5J 0583 Fig 122 Unlock the operating lever of the ball head removing the ball head CQ Read and observe H and on page 121 first gt Remove
222. mine which deployment conditions apply to the airbag system in every situation An important role is played by factors such as the type of object that the vehicle hits hard soft the impact angle vehicle speed etc A decisive factor for the deployment of the airbags is the deceleration which occurs The control unit analyses the nature of the collision and activates the relevant restraint system If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured during the collision remains below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit the airbags are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe dam age to the bodywork as a consequence of the accident The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal collision gt Driver s front airbag gt Front passenger airbag The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side collision gt Front side airbag on the side of the accident gt Head airbags on the side of the accident In the event of an accident in which the airbags are deployed gt the interior lighting comes on if the switch for the interior light is in the door contact position gt the hazard warning light is switched on gt all the doors are unlocked gt the fuel supply to the engine is interrupted CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Front airbags 15 Side airbags 16 Head airbags 17
223. n windscreen wipers and windscreen washer sys tem can be used gt Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox Please note that the brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is running If the engine is not running significantly more physical force is required to depress the brake pedal and steer the vehicle If using a tow rope ensure that it is always kept taught EE CAUTION Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump start aid page 163 Jump starting f the gearbox no longer contains any oil because of a defect your vehicle must only be towed with the driven wheels raised clear of the ground or on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer a The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the towing dis tance is greater than 50 km To protect both vehicles when tow starting or towing the tow rope should be elastic Thus one should only use plastic fibre rope or a rope made out of a similarly elastic material a While towing take care to avoid impermissibly high tensile forces or jerky loads There is always a risk of excessive stresses and damage resulting at the points to which you attach the tow rope or tow bar when y
224. n independent workshop gt SKODA service partner A workshop that has been contractually author ized by the manufacturer KODA AUTO a s or its sales partner to perform service tasks on SKODA vehicles and to sell SKODA Genuine Parts gt KODA partner A company that has been authorized by the manufacturer KODA AUTO a s or its sales partner to sell new KODA vehicles and when applicable to service them using SKODA Genuine Parts and sell SKODA Gen uine Parts Owner s Manual These operating instructions apply to all body variants of the vehicle and all related models The manual describes all possible equipment variants without identifying them as special equipment model variants or market dependent equipment Consequently this vehicle does not necessarily contain all of the equipment components described in this Owner s Manual The scope of equipment of your vehicle relates to your purchase contract for the vehicle More information is available from the SKODA Partner from whom you bought the vehicle The illustrations can differ in minor details from your vehicle they are only in tended for general information Supplementary Information applies to Russia The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the registration documents Abbreviations Safety Passive Safety General information Correct and safe seated position Seat belts Wearing seat belts
225. n is switched on Fig 44 Dash panel Hazard warning light system button QO Read and observe H on page 56 first gt Press the A Fig 44 button All the turn signal lights on the vehicle flash at the same time when the hazard warning light system is switched on The warning light for the turn signals and the warning light in the button also flash at the same time The hazard warn ing light system can also be operated if the ignition is switched off The hazard warning light system will switch on automatically if one of the air bags is deployed TE CAUTION Switch on the hazard warning light system if for example the following oc curs a You encounter a traffic jam The vehicle has broken down QO Read and observe H on page 56 first Switching on the parking light P lt gt Switch off the ignition 60 Using the system gt Pull the turn signal stalk Fig 42 on page 58 upwards or downwards the side light on the right or left side of the vehicle is switched on Switching on the side lights on both sides gt Turn the light switch Fig 40 on page 56 to the position and lock the ve hicle F Note The parking light P can only be activated if the ignition is switched off a f the right or left turn signal light has been switched on and the ignition is switched off the parking light is not automatically switched on This chapter contains information on the following sub
226. n it has got stuck Ensure the TCS is activated again afterwards You can switch TCS off and on again as needed by pressing the but ton Fig 112 The warning light comes on in the instrument cluster when the TCS is deactivated The TCS warning light page 41 lights up in the instrument cluster when there is a fault on the TCS Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS A Read and observe H and H on page 115 first If one of the wheels starts to spin the EDL system brakes the spinning wheel and transfers the driving force to the other wheels This ensures the stability of the vehicle and a quick journey EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the brake of the wheel being braked The vehicle can continue to be driven and has the same characteristics as a vehicle not fitted with EDL The EDL switches on again automatically as soon as the brake has cooled down XDL function Fabia RS and Fabia Estate RS only XDL is an extension to the electronic differential lock XDL does not respond to traction but to the relief of the inner front wheel during fast cornering The ac tive brake intervention on the brake of the inner wheel prevents it from spin ning Thus the traction is improved and the vehicle continues to follow the de sired track CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Function 117 Activation deactivation 117 E WARNING a The parking
227. n the locking button Fig 103 gt Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button The handbrake warning light lights up when the handbrake is applied pro vided the ignition is on H WARNING Please note that the handbrake must be fully released A handbrake which is only partially released can result in the rear brakes overheating This can have a negative effect on the operation of the brake system there is a risk of an accident TE CAUTION After the vehicle has come to a standstill always engage the handbrake firmly and then engage the first gear vehicles with manual gearbox or move the se lector lever to the P position vehicles with automatic transmission CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Manual gear changing 105 Pedals 105 Manual gear changing Fig 104 Shift pattern of the 5 speed manual gearbox Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down This prevents uneven wear on the clutch The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear page 28 Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary Depress the clutch pedal and hold it fully depressed Wait a moment before reverse gear is engag ed to avoid any shift noises The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged provided the ignition is on E WARNING Never engage reverse gear when driving there is the risk of an accident EE CAUTION If no
228. n through brief voice pause all of the digits detected up to now are repeated by the system The digits 0 9 symbols are permitted The system detects no continu ous digit combinations such as twenty three but only individually spoken dig its two three Switching on voice control gt Press the 4 button on the adapter Fig 100 on page 96 briefly gt Press the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel briefly page 95 Operating the phone on the multifunction steering wheel Switching off voice control If the system is currently playing a message the message that is currently be ing played will have to be stopped as follows gt Press the 4 button on the adapter briefly gt Press the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel briefly If the system is expecting a voice command you can end the dialogue yourself as follows gt with the CANCEL voice command gt Press the 4 button on the adapter gt Press the 1 button on the multifunction steering wheel briefly E Note The dialogue of an incoming call is immediately interrupted The voice control is only possible in vehicles fitted with a multifunction steering wheel with telephone control or a phone mount and adapter Voice commands Basic voice commands Voice command Action HELP commands This command calls up the contact from the phone book After this command for example the phone book can be repeated b
229. nd burn themselves EF Note The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12Volt socket for electrical appliances page 80 a Further information page 127 Services modifications and technical alter ations 80 Using the system 12 volt power outlet Fig 81 Boot 12 Volt power socket N Read and observe H on page 79 first The 12 volt electrical outlet hereinafter referred to only as a socket is located in the front center console Fig 80 on page 80 and in the luggage compart ment Fig 81 Use gt Remove the cover from power socket or cigarette lighter or open the cover for the power socket gt Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket The power socket and any connected appliances can also be operated when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn H Further information page 127 Services modifications and technical altera tions HU WARNING Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can cause fires burns and other serious injuries Therefore when leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent such as children unattended in the vehicle a f the connected electric device becomes too hot switch it off and discon nect it from the power supply immediately EE CAUTION The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical acces sories with a total power uptake of up to 120
230. ndscreen wiper blades 64 Replenishing Coolant 145 Engine oil 144 Windscreen washer fluid 141 Rims 150 Roof luggage rack Attachment points 78 Roof rack system 77 Roof load 78 Running in the first 1500 km 109 Running in Brake pads 110 Engine 109 Tyres 110 S SAFE see Safe securing 46 SAFELOCK see Safe securing 46 Safe securing 46 Safety 6 Child safety 19 Child safety seats 19 Correct seated position 7 Head restraints 69 ISOFIX 22 TOP TETHER 23 Save electricity 110 Seals Vehicle care 131 Seat Adjusting 66 Seat belt warning light 36 Seat belts 10 Belt tensioners 13 Cleaning 135 fastening and unfastening 12 Height adjustment 13 Seatbelts Inertia reels 13 Seat belts The physical principle of a frontal collision 1 Seats folding forward 67 Head restraints 69 Heating 67 Removing the seats 68 Seats and storage 66 see Automatic gearbox Manual gear shifting on the multifunction steering wheel 107 Selector lever see Using the selector lever 106 Service display 32 Service intervals 127 Setting Heating 88 Manual air conditioning system 90 Manually dimmed rear view mirror 65 Setting the clock Clock 28 Shifting gears Driving and saving energy T10 Side airbag 16 Sliding tilting roof 54 Comfort operation 55 Emergency operation 55 Opening and raising 54 Operation 54 Sliding tilting sunroof
231. new engine has a higher oil consumption at first and reaches its lowest level only after a certain running in time The oil consump tion of a new vehicle can therefore only be correctly assessed after driving about 5 000 km 112 Driving For the sake of the environment Additional improvements to the fuel economy can be made by using synthet ic high lubricity oils Regularly check the ground under the vehicle Have your vehicle inspected by a specialist garage if you find any stains caused by oil or other fluids on the ground Note We recommend that your vehicle is serviced on a regular basis by a SKODA Service Partner Saving electrical energy N Read and observe M on page 110 first When the engine is running the alternator generates and supplies electrical power If more electrical components of the electrical system are switched on more fuel is needed to operate the alternator We therefore recommend switching off electrical components if these are no longer required Environmental compatibility AN Read and observe H on page 110 first Environmental protection has played a major role in the design selection of materials and manufacture of your new SKODA Particular emphasis has been placed on the following points Design measures gt Joints designed to be easily detached gt Simplified disassembly due to the modular structure system gt Improved purity of different classes of materials gt Identifica
232. ng instructions If the side lights are switched on the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel are illuminated The buttons apply for the respective operating mode of the current radio or navigation system The following functions can be completed by pressing or turning the buttons ment Action Radio traffic information CD MP3 Navigation wheel Fig 101 Press briefly Switch off on tone Press button fora long period of time Switch the unit on off Turn upwards Increase the volume Turn downwards Decrease volume Press briefly Change to the next preset radio station Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the next title Press button fora time long period of Search forwards Fast forward Press briefly Change to the previous preset radio station Interruption of the traffic report Changing to the previous title Press button fora MH oe Mw N eel E time 100 Using the system long period of Search backwards Fast rewind Note a The functions of button 1 are different for vehicles fitted with a universal telephone preinstallation GSM II page 95 a The loudspeakers in the vehicle are adjusted to the power output of the ra dio and navigation system of 4x20 W AUX and MDI inputs The AUX input is located below the front armrest and is marked with AUX The MDI input AUX and USB is located at the front under the storage com par
233. ning light 4 lights up when any of the following conditions are true gt The tyre pressure is low gt The structure of the tyre is damaged gt The vehicle is loaded on one side gt The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily e g when towing a trailer or when driving uphill or downhill gt Snow chains are fitted gt The spare wheel is fitted gt One wheel per axle was changed 154 General Maintenance HU WARNING a When the warning light illuminates immediately reduce the speed and avoid sudden steering and brake manoeuvres Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and inspect the tyres and their inflation pressure Under certain circumstances e g sporty style of driving wintry or un paved roads the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all EE CAUTION The system cannot warn in case of very rapid loss of tyre pressure e g in the event of a sudden puncture In this case carefully bring the vehicle to a stand still without sudden steering movements or sharp braking a The basic setting must be repeated every 10 000 km or once a year to ensure proper functioning of the tyre pressure monitor The tyre pressure monitor does not replace the need to check tyre pressure regularly Spare and back up wheel Fig 136 Fixing the back up or spare wheel A Read and observe H and H on page 150 first The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the boot and
234. nstructions Instruments and Indicator Lights 33 Settings A Read and observe H on page 33 first You can change certain settings yourself through the MAXI DOT display The current menu item is shown in the top of the display under a line You can select the following menu options Language You can set the language for the warning and information texts here MFD data Activate or deactivate certain displays of the multifunction display here Time The time time format 12 or 24 hour indicator and the changeover between Summer winter time can be set here Winter tyres Here you can set the speed at which an audible signal should sound This function is for example used for winter tyres where the maximum permissible speed is lower than the maximum speed of the vehicle The following is shown on the information display if this speed is exceeded Winter tyres maximum km h Units of measurement The units for the temperature consumption and distance driven can be set here Alt speed dis Display of the second speed in mph can be activated here Service The days and kilometres remaining until the next service can be displayed here Factory setting The display can be restored to its factory settings here 1 On models on which the speedometer indicates mph the second speed is displayed in km h 34 Using the system Door boot lid and bonnet warning N Read and observe H on page 33 first If at least one d
235. nt of an accident EE CAUTION Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey There is a risk of spilling e g when braking which may cause damage to the electrical components or seat upholstery Ashtray B5J 0507 Fig 79 Centre console ARG at the front rear A Read and observe H on page 79 first The ashtray can be used for discarding ash cigarettes cigars and the like H Removing gt Pull the ashtray Fig 79 out and up Fitting gt Insert the ashtray vertically E WARNING Never put flammable objects in the ashtray there is a risk of fire EE CAUTION Do not hold the ashtray by the cover when removing it there is a risk of it breaking Seats and storage 79 Cigarette lighter Fig 80 Centre console Cigarette lighter a SS A Read and observe H on page 79 first Operation gt Press in the button in the cigarette lighter Fig 80 gt Wait until the button pops forward gt Remove the cigarette lighter immediately and use gt Place the cigarette lighter back into the socket H WARNING Take care when using the cigarette lighter Improper use of the cigarette lighter can cause burns The cigarette lighter also operates when the ignition is switched off or the ignition key withdrawn Therefore when leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely independent such as children unat tended in the vehicle These could operate the igniter a
236. nteri or lighting version 1 Fig 47 Interior lights at the rear Press the switch Fig 47 to turn the light on or off gt When opening the flap of the storage compartment on the front passenger side the lighting in the storage compartment comes on gt The light switches on automatically when the parking light is switched on and goes out when the flap is closed The light comes on automatically when the boot lid is opened If the tailgate remains open for more than 10 minutes the luggage compartment light switches off automatically This chapter contains information on the following subjects Rear window heating 62 Sun visors 62 Lights and visibility 61 Rear window heating Fig 48 Button for rear window heater gt The rear window heater is switched on or off by pressing the but ton Fig 48 the warning light in the switch comes on or goes out The rear window heater can only be switched on when the engine is running The rear window heater switches off automatically after approximately 7 mi nutes For the sake of the environment The heating should be switched off as soon as the window is de iced or free from mist The reduced current consumption will have a favourable effect on fuel economy page 112 Saving electrical energy EF Note If the on board voltage drops the rear window heater switches off automati cally in order to provide sufficient electrical energy for the en
237. ntroduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Operating conditions for the system 119 Operation 120 System conditioned automatic start up 120 Manually deactivating activating 120 Information messages 120 The START STOP system hereinafter referred to just as the system reduces fuel consumption and polluting emissions and CO 2 emissions by turning the engine off e g when stopping at traffic lights and starting the engine again when moving off U WARNING Never let the vehicle roll with the engine switched off The brake servo unit and power steering only operate if the engine is run ning Operating conditions for the system 14 18 14 18 1 Ss Travel time 30 min Fig 115 Maxi DOT display Engine is auto matically switched off automat ic engine cut off is not possible Travel time 30 min 229 tri 22 3 ie km o i trip 1255 10 2 km 1255 Dira A Read and observe H on page 119 first For the system dependent automatic engine shutdown to operate the follow ing conditions must be met v The driver s door is closed The driver has fastened the seat belt The bonnet is closed The driving speed exceeded 4 km h after the last stop No trailer is coupled S SSS Some additional conditions for the system to function cannot be either influ enced or recognised by the driver Therefore the system can react differently in situations which are identical
238. nts Seats and storage 73 Removing and installing carrier rails Net partition Fabia Estate CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Using the net partition behind the rear seats 74 Using the net partition behind the front seats 75 JA OF 2 Removing and refitting the net partition housing 75 AW 1 E WARNING Ta eS The belt locks and the belts must be in their original position after folding back the seat cushions and backrests they must be ready to use Fig 69 Slacken check points remove carrier rails The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart CQ Read and observe H on page 73 first ment under sudden braking there is a risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its func tion Make sure that the transverse rod is inserted into the mounts C Fig 70 on page 74 or Fig 71 on page 75 in the forward position Removing gt Undo the securing points B Fig 69 on the carrier rails using the vehicle key or a flat screwdriver gt Grasp the carrier rail A at position 1 and slacken it by pulling in the direc tion of arrow You can take out the removable storage compartments in or der to facilitate the removal page 84 Storage compartm
239. nts it could result in damage to the films The following instructions must be observed for the high pressure washing the vehicle gt The minimum distance between the nozzle and the vehicle body should be 50 cm gt Keep the jet perpendicular to the film surface gt The maximum water temperature is 50 C gt The maximum water pressure is 80 bar EE CAUTION No ice scrapers should be used in the winter months to remove ice and snow from the areas to which films have been applied Do not remove frozen snow or ice using other objects there is a risk of damage to the film Windows and exterior mirrors A Read and observe H and M on page 130 first Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and mir rors Clean the windows regularly with clean water inside and out Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a cloth intended for this purpose When drying the windows after washing the vehicle do not use window leath ers that have been used to polish the bodywork Residues of preservatives in the chamois leather can smear the windows and reduce visibility 132 General Maintenance EE CAUTION The ice scraper should not be moved forward and backward but in one direc tion to avoid any damage to the surface of the glass Snow or ice that is contaminated with coarse dirt such as fine gravel sand and salt must not be removed from the window glass and mirrors risk of damage to th
240. number than the one prescribed the journey must only be continued at medium engine speeds and a low engine load Driving at high engine revs or a high engine load can severely damage the engine Refuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible Engine parts can be damaged if petrol with a lower octane number than the one prescribed is used Petrol of an octane rating lower than 91 RON must not be used even in the event of an emergency otherwise the engine could be severely damaged EE CAUTION In no case may fuel additives with metal components be used especially not with manganese and iron content LRP lead replacement petrol fuels with metallic constituents may not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system Fuels with metallic constituents may not be used There is a risk of causing considerable damage to parts of the engine or exhaust system Note a Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the engine can be used without limitations The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not re sult in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in ve hicles for which unleaded petrol 95 91 92 or 93 RON is specified On vehicles using prescribed unleaded petrol of min 95 RON the use of pet rol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and re duce fuel consump
241. ock the car turn on the ignition or start the engine there is a danger of injury and accidents Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running there is an accident damage or theft risk Never switch off the engine before the vehicle has come to a halt there is the risk of an accident HH WARNING Never leave the engine running in unventilated or closed rooms The en gine s exhaust gases also contain the odourless and colourless carbon monoxide a poisonous gas risk of death Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness and death 102 Driving EE CAUTION The starter must only be operated when the engine is not running and the vehicle is at a standstill The starter or engine can be damaged if the starter is activated when the engine is running 3 Fig 102 on page 103 If the engine does not start up after a second attempt the fuse for the fuel pump may have a fault Check the fuse and replace if necessary page 167 or seek assistance from a specialist garage Let go of the ignition key as soon as the engine starts otherwise the starter could be damaged Do not tow start the engine there is a risk of damaging the engine and the catalytic converter The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump Start aid page 163 Jump starting TE CAUTION a Avoid high engine speeds full throttle and high engine loads until the engine has yet reached its operating temperature there is a risk of
242. olant temperature is indicated only by one of the warning lights page 37 Coolant coming on or going off Cold range The pointer in the left of the scale indicates that the engine has not yet reached its operating temperature Avoid high speeds full throttle and high engine loads This prevents possible damage to the engine The operating range The engine has reached its operating temperature as soon as the pointer moves into the middle of the scale At very high ambient temperatures or un der heavy engine loads the pointer may move even further to the right High temperature range The coolant temperature is too high if the pointer reaches the red area of the scale Further information page 37 EE CAUTION Additional headlights and other attached components in front of the air inlet impair the cooling efficiency of the coolant Never cover the radiator there is a risk of the engine overheating Fuel gauge Q Read and observe H on page 26 first The fuel gauge 7 Fig 19 on page 26 only works when the ignition is switch ed on The fuel remaining is displayed in the segment display on vehicles with the segment display The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres The warning light lights up when the fuel level reaches the reserve range H page 40 Instruments and Indicator Lights 27 CAUTION Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty The irregular supply of fuel can cause misfiring
243. ompletely EE CAUTION Regularly vacuum dust from the seat covers using a vacuum cleaner a Electrically heated seats must not be dried after cleaning by switching on the heater Do not sit on wet seats there is a risk of stretching the upholstery a Always clean the seats from seam to seam Seat belts N Read and observe H and H on page 133 first The belt must always be kept clean Wash dirty seat belts with a mild soapy solution Remove dirt with a soft brush Soiled belts may impair proper operation of the inertia reels E WARNING The seat belts must not be removed for cleaning Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could destroy the fabric Carcare 135 E WARNING Continued a The seat belts must not be allowed to come into contact with corrosive liquids such as acids etc Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis If any damage is found in the belt fabric seat belt connections inertia reel or the buckle the relevant seat belt must be replaced by a specialist garage a Inertia reel belts must be completely dried before being rolled up 136 General Maintenance CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Refuelling 137 Unleaded petrol 137 Diesel fuel 138 The correct grades of fuel for your vehicle are stated on a sticker affixed to the inside of the fuel filler flap Fig 123 on page 137 B
244. on A Fig 22 on page 30 to select the Warning at MAXI DOT display or segment display menu item gt Press button B to activate the ability to set the speed limit value flashes gt Use the button A to set the required speed limit e g 50 km h gt Confirm the speed limit that was set with button B or wait approx 5 sec onds until the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing This allows you to set the speed in 5 km h intervals Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving gt Press button A Fig 22 on page 30 to select the Warning at MAXI DOT display or segment display menu item gt Drive at the desired speed e g 50 km h gt Press button B to accept the current speed as the speed limit the value flashes If you wish to adjust the set speed limit you can do so in 5 km h intervals e g the accepted speed of 47 km h increases to 50 km h or decreases to 45 km h gt Confirm the speed limit that was set by pressing button B again or wait ap prox 5 seconds until the setting is saved automatically the value stops flashing Change or delete speed limit gt Press button A Fig 22 on page 30 to select the Warning at MAXI DOT display or segment display menu item gt Pressing button B disables the speed limit gt Pressing the button B activates the ability to change the speed limit If the set speed limit is exceeded an audible signal
245. onal display navigation system the device connected to the MDI input and the automatic gearbox page 106 Lighting up of certain symbols is combined with an acoustic warning signal WARNING Concentrate fully on your driving at all times As the driver you are fully re sponsible for the operation of your vehicle Main menu Fig 24 Operating stalk MAXI DOT dis play controls Ql Read and observe H on page 33 first gt Press and hold rocker switch A Fig 24 to activate the MAIN MENU gt Individual menu items can be selected by pressing rocker switch A When the pushbutton B is briefly pressed the information you have selected is displayed Overview of the menu items in the main menu MFD Multifunction display page 29 Audio Operating instructions for the radio Navigation Operating instructions for the navigation system Phone page 93 Vehicle status page 34 Settings page 34 The Audio and Navigation menu items are only displayed when the factory fit ted radio or navigation system is switched on E Note Warning messages shown in the information display must be confirmed by pressing button B briefly Fig 24 to call up the main menu The menu always shifts to one of the higher levels after 10 seconds if the display is not currently active a Using the factory fitted radio or navigation system Radio operating in structions or Navigation system operating i
246. onal legis lation Note Because of the special tools and knowledge required and to avoid any poten tial problems with the cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle we rec ommend that cleaning and care of the interior of your vehicle be carried out by a SKODA Service Partner Caring for vehicle paintwork N Read and observe H and on page 130 first Treat minor paint damage such as scratches scuffs or chips immediately if possible with paint pens or sprays Preserving the vehicle paintwork Thorough wax treatment is an effective way of protecting the paintwork from harmful environmental influences The vehicle must be treated with a high quality hard wax polish at the latest when no more drops form on the clean paintwork A new layer of a high quality hard wax polish can be applied to the clean body work after it has dried thoroughly Even if you use a wax preserver regularly we still recommend that you treat the paintwork of the vehicle at least twice a year with hard wax Polishing Polishing is necessary if the vehicle s paintwork has become unattractive and if it is no longer possible to achieve a gloss with wax preservatives If the polish does not contain any preserving elements the paint must be trea ted with a preservative afterwards EE CAUTION Never apply wax to the windows Mat painted or plastic parts must not be treated with polishing products or hard waxes Do not polish the paintwor
247. ons animals or objects positioned be tween the occupants and the deployment area of the airbag In addition none of the occupants should lean their head out of the window when driv ing or extend their arms and hands out of the window In vehicles with head airbags the word AIRBAG can be seen on the B column cladding CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Deactivating airbags 18 Switching off the front passenger airbag 18 Airbag system 17 Deactivating airbags Deactivating an airbag should be considered only in the following cases for example gt When using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child has its back to the vehicle s direction of travel in some countries this must be in the direction of travel due to different legal regulations applying page 19 Transporting children safely gt If it is not possible to maintain a distance of at least 25 cm between the mid dle of the steering wheel and chest despite the driver s seat being correctly adjusted gt If special attachments are required in the area of the steering wheel because of a physical disability gt If other seats have been installed e g orthopaedic seats without side air bags The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key operated switch page 18 We recommend that you ask a SKODA Service Partner to switch off any other airbags Monitoring the airbag
248. oor is open or the boot or bonnet is open the MAXI DOT dis play shows the vehicle with the corresponding door or boot bonnet open An audible signal also sounds if the vehicle is travelling at more than 6 km h Auto Check Control A Read and observe H on page 33 first Vehicle condition Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked continuously when the ignition is switched on and also while driving Some error messages and other information are displayed in the MAXI DOT display The messages are displayed simultaneously with the icons in the MAXI DOT display or with the warning lights in the instrument cluster page 35 The Vehicle status menu item is shown in the main menu of the MAXI DOT display whenever at least one fault message is present The first of the fault messages is displayed after this menu item is selected Several error messages are shown on the display under the message e g 1 3 This indicates that the first of a total of three error messages is being displayed As long as the operational faults are not rectified the symbols are always indi cated again After they are displayed for the first time the symbols continue to be indicated without any extra messages for the driver Warning symbols Engine oil pressure too low page 36 Clutches of the automatic DSG gearbox are too hot page 34 Check engine oil level engine oil sensor defective page 36 i Clutch
249. op and switch off the engine if the warning light in the instrument cluster Starts to flash Wait a few minutes and check the level of coolant page 145 Checking the coolant level The following guidelines must be observed page 37 Coolant The coolant temperature can be reduced by switching on the heating H WARNING Adapt your speed to the conditions of the road surface and to the traffic situation Improper or incorrectly connected electric cables can energise the trailer and cause functional faults to the vehicle s entire electrical system as well as accidents and severe injuries Work on the electrical system must only be carried out by specialist ga rages Never directly connect the trailer s electrical system with the electrical connections for the tail lights or other current sources Note After coupling the trailer and connecting up the power socket check the rear lights on the trailer to ensure they work a f there is an error in the trailer lighting system check the fuses in the fuse box in the dashboard page 167 a If you tow a trailer frequently you should also have your car inspected be tween service intervals The handbrake on the towing vehicle must be applied when coupling and un coupling the trailer Anti theft alarm system N Read and observe H on page 125 first When the vehicle is locked the alarm is activated as soon as the electrical con nection to the trailer is inte
250. open it can be fatal Locking unlocking the vehicle without central locking Fig 29 Securing knob in the front door rear door The locking knob Fig 29 will move upwards or downwards when you lock or unlock the door Unlocking from the outside gt Unlock the front door with the key page 47 Unlocking from the inside gt Pull on the door opening lever Locking from the outside gt Lock the front door with the key page 47 Locking from the inside gt Push the locking knob Fig 29 down E WARNING Locked doors prevent unwanted entry into the vehicle from outside for ex ample at road crossings Locked doors do however make it more difficult for rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk of death EF Note Lock the opened rear doors and front passenger door by closing them and pressing the securing knob It is not possible to lock the opened driver s door using the securing knob This prevents against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle Emergency locking of the doors Fig 30 Rear door Emergency locking of the door X An emergency locking mechanism is located on the end face of the doors which have no locking cylinder it is only visible after the door is opened B5J 0258 Locking gt Remove the cover A Fig 30 gt Insert the key into the slot B and turn it into the horizontal position in the direction of the arrow mirror inverted on the right doors
251. or headlights 171 Licence plate light bulb Low beam and high beam bulb halogen head lights Low beam and high beam bulb halogen pro jector headlights Wheels 173 170 171 158 Changing a wheel Preparation 159 Removing and fitting a wheel 159 Subsequent steps 159 Charging a vehicle battery 149 Check Fit ball head properly 123 Checking Battery electrolyte level 148 Brake fluid 146 Coolant level 145 Engine oil 143 Oil level 143 Windscreen washer fluid 141 Children and safety 19 Child safety Side airbag 21 Child safety lock 44 Child safety seat Use of child safety seats 21 Child seat Classification 21 ISOFIX 22 on the front passenger seat 20 TOP TETHER 23 Use of ISOFIX child seats 22 Chrome parts refer to Taking care of your vehicle 131 Cigarette lighter 80 Cleaning 127 Alcantara 135 Covers on electrically heated seats 135 Fabrics 135 Headlight lenses 132 Natural leather 134 Plastic parts 131 Synthetic leather 135 Wheels 133 Climatronic 91 Automatic mode 92 Control elements 91 Controlling the blower 92 Defrosting windscreen 93 Recirculated air mode 92 Setting the temperature 92 Clock 28 Clothes hook 81 Cockpit 12 volt power outlet 80 Ashtray 79 Cigarette lighter 80 General view 25 Light
252. ore recommend that you have the battery checked and if necessary recharged by a specialist garage before the start of the winter EH CAUTION For technical reasons on vehicles with the description AGM the electrolyte level cannot be checked Note The battery electrolyte level is also periodically checked by a specialist garage as part of the Inspection Service Charging A Read and observe H and H on page 147 first A properly charged vehicle battery is essential for reliably starting the engine gt Switch off the ignition and all of the electrical components gt Only when performing a quick charge disconnect both battery cables first negative then positive gt Attach the terminal clamps of the charger to the battery terminals red positive black negative gt Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch the charger on gt Once charging is complete Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca ble from the power socket gt Only then disconnect the charger s terminal clamps gt Reconnect the cables to the battery first positive then negative It is not necessary to disconnect the battery cables if you are recharging the vehicle battery using low amperages for example from a mini charger Refer to the charger manufacturer s instructions A charging current of 0 1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity or low er must
253. ot fasten the seat belts when driving lean too far forward or adopt an incorrect seated position you are exposing yourself to increased risk of injury in the event of an accident Ey WARNING Information on the use of the airbag system a f there is a fault the airbag system must be checked by a specialist ga rage immediately Otherwise there is a risk of the airbag not being activa ted in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system a Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage a Never make any changes to the front bumper or bodywork a t is prohibited to tamper with individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed The protective function of the airbag system is sufficient for only one ac cident The airbag system must then be replaced if the airbag has been de ployed 14 Safety System description QN Read and observe H on page 14 first The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the indicator light in the instrument cluster page 40 When the airbags are deployed they fill with gas and inflate A grey white or red non harmful gas is released when the airbag is inflated This is perfectly normal and is not an indication of a fire in the vehicle Th
254. ote has to always be removed before starting off in order not to restrict the driver s vision QJ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Storage compartments on the front passenger side 82 Cooling the storage compartment on the front passenger side 82 Storage compartment on the driver s side 82 Map pockets in the front seats 82 Glasses storage box 83 Stowage compartment in centre console 83 Stowage compartment underneath the front passenger seat 83 Front armrest with storage compartment 84 Storage compartments in the doors 84 Storage compartments in the boot 84 Flexible storage compartment 85 E WARNING Do not place anything on the dash panel These objects might slide or fall down while you are driving under acceleration or when cornering and could distract you from the traffic there is a risk of an accident Make sure that no objects from the centre console or from other storage compartments can get into the driver s footwell while you are driving You would then no longer be able to apply the brakes or operate the clutch or accelerator pedal there is a risk of an accident Seats and storage 81 Storage compartments on the front passenger side Fig 83 Dash panel Storage compart ments on the front passenger side 7 N Read and observe H on page 81 first Open close gt Pull the cover handle in the direction of the arrow Fig 83 and fold down
255. ou attempt to tow a vehicle which is not standing on a paved road a Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes page 166 Front towing eye or page 166 Rear towing eye to the detachable ball head of the towing equipment page 121 Emergency equipment and self help 165 Note We recommend using a tow rope from KODA Original Accessories available from a SKODA Partner Towing another vehicle requires a certain amount of practice Both drivers should be familiar with the particular points about towing a vehicle Unskilled drivers should not attempt to tow in another vehicle or to be towed in When towing respect the national legal provisions especially those which relate to the identification of the towing vehicle and the vehicle being towed The tow rope must not be twisted as it may in certain circumstances result in the front towing eye being unscrewed out of your vehicle Front towing eye Be 85 0521 Fig 148 Removing the cap installing the towing eye N Read and observe M on page 165 first Remove the cap carefully as follows gt Press on the left half of the cap in the area of the arrow Fig 148 A gt Remove the cap from the front bumper gt Screw the towing eye in clockwise by hand up to the stop Fig 148 B For tightening purposes we recommend for example using the wheel wrench towing eye from another vehicle or a similar object that can be pushed through the
256. out of gear The vehicle could then start to move risk of accident These individuals would possibly not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help them selves At very high or very low temperatures can be fatal CAUTION a Each key contains electronic components therefore it must be protected against moisture and severe shocks Keep the groove of the keys absolutely clean Impurities textile fibres dust etc have a negative effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ig nition lock Operation of the remote control may temporarily be affected by interference from transmitters close to the car operating in the same frequency range e g mobile phone TV transmitter The battery must be replaced if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at less than 3 metres away page 43 Note a When leaving the vehicle always check if this is locked a Please contact a specialist garage if you lose a key as they can obtain a new one for you Replacing the battery in the remote control key Fig 26 Remote control key Remove cover remove battery Each remote control key contains a battery located under the cover A Fig 26 The battery needs replacing if red indicator light Fig 25 on page 42 B does not go on when you press a button on the remote control key We recommend having key battery replaced by a specialist garage How ever if you would like to replace the discharged battery
257. oy wheels is 120 Nm E WARNING Continued a f the wheel bolts are tightened to a too low tightening torque the rim can come loose when the car is moving risk of accident A tightening tor que which is too high can damage the bolts and threads and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim a In case of incorrect treatment of the wheel bolts the wheel can loosen when the car is moving risk of accident E WARNING Information on the spare wheel Only use the spare wheel while absolutely necessary Never drive with more than one spare wheel mounted a The snow chains cannot be used on the spare wheel EE CAUTION a f a spare wheel is used that is not identical to the fitted tyres the following must be observed page 154 Spare and back up wheel Protect the tyres from contact with oil grease and fuel Replace lost dust caps a f in the event of a puncture it is necessary to fit a spare wheel with a tyre without a dedicated running direction or the opposite running direction drive carefully as the optimum characteristics of the tyre are no longer applicable in this situation For the sake of the environment Tyres which are insufficiently inflated increase your fuel consumption Note We recommend that any work on the wheels or tyres is carried out by a spe cialist garage We recommend that you use wheel rims tyres full wheel trims and snow chains from SKODA Original Ac
258. pecialist workshop Safe securing AN Read and observe M on page 46 first The central locking system is equipped with a safe securing system The door locks are blocked automatically if the vehicle is locked from the outside It is then not possible to open the doors with the door handle either from the in side or from the outside You will be informed that the safe securing system is activated after the vehi cle is locked by the CHECK DEADLOCK message on the instrument cluster dis play On vehicles equipped with the MAXI DOT display the display shows Check deadlock Log book Switching off Opening can take place in one of the following ways gt By locking twice within 2 seconds gt By disabling the interior monitoring page 50 Interior monitor and towing protection If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off the door can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever Switching on The safelock switches on automatically the next time the vehicle is locked and unlocked Switch on display The warning light flashes for around 2 seconds in quick succession afterwards it begins to flash evenly at longer intervals Switch off display The indicator light in the driver door flashes for about 2 seconds fast goes out and starts to flash regularly at longer intervals after about 30 seconds HU WARNING If the car is locked from the outside and the safelock system is s
259. play The display of the second speed can be set in the Settings menu item page 34 Settings Segment display gt Press the 5 Fig 19 on page 26key repeatedly until the odometer display flashes page 28 gt Press the 6 key while the display is flashing The second speed is displayed instead of the odometer Display of the second speed can be disabled in the same way Fig 20 Recommended gear Qy N Recommended gear on wa 358 a QN Read and observe H on page 26 first The gear currently engaged is shown in the instrument cluster display A Fig 20 In order to minimise the fuel consumption a recommendation for shifting into another gear is indicated in the display If the control unit recognises that it is beneficial to change gear an arrow B is shown in the display The arrow points up or down depending on whether you should shift into a higher or lower gear At the same time the recommended gear is shown at A instead of the gear selected on vehicles with a manual gearbox EE CAUTION The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different driv ing situations such as overtaking CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Memory 29 Operation 30 Multifunction display details 30 Warning against speeding 31 The multifunction display can only be operated when the ignition is switched on After the ignition is
260. pright position until the securing knob clicks into place check by pulling on the seat backrest H gt Make sure that the red pin B is hidden D WARNING The belts and the belt locks must be in their original position after folding back the seat backrests they must be ready to use a The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no ob jects from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compart ment under sudden braking there is a risk of injury a Ensure that the rear seat backrests are properly engaged It is only then that the three point seat belt for the middle seat can reliably fulfil its func tion EE CAUTION Ensure that the seat belts are not damaged when operating the seat backr ests Under no circumstances must the rear seat belts be jammed by the fol ded back seat backrests F Note On vehicles with an installed net partition housing first fold back the left seat rest followed by the right one 68 Using the system Folding the seat cushions forwards removing Fig 58 Folding the seat cushions forwards and removing The luggage compartment can be increased in size by folding the seat backr ests forward or by removing the rear seats Folding forward gt Pull up the seat squab in the direction of the arrow 1 Fig 58 and fold for wards in the direction of the arrow 2 Removing gt Fold the seat cushion forward gt Press the wire loops in the direction o
261. r blades should be cleaned on a regular basis with a windscreen cleaner to avoid any smears The wiper blades should be cleaned with a sponge or cloth if they are heavily soiled by insect residues for example Windscreen wiper and washer 3 Fig 50 Operating stalk Windscreen wipers and washer settings 4 4 0276 A Read and observe H and M on page 62 first Control stalk positions Fig 50 Wipers off Interval windscreen wiping Slow windscreen wiping Rapid windscreen wiping Single windscreen wipe spring loaded position Automatic wipe wash for windscreen spring loaded position Wiping the rear window the wiper wipes at regular intervals after a few seconds Automatic wipe wash for the rear window spring loaded position Switch for setting the desired interval between the individual windscreen wipes 1 Interval windscreen wiping Ey EDS 59 EIN Automatic wipe wash for windscreen The wash system operates immediately the windscreen wipers wipe some what later Releasing the lever will stop the windscreen washer while the wipers continue for another 1 to 3 wiper strokes depending on the period the windscreen has been sprayed Automatic wipe wash for the rear window The wash system operates immediately the wiper wipes somewhat later Releasing the lever will stop the washer while the wipers continue for another 1 to 3 wiper strokes depending on the period the window has been sprayed
262. r so New brake pads New brake pads initially do not provide optimal braking performance They first need to be run in Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or so CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Driving with anticipation 110 Economical gear changing 110 Avoiding full throttle 111 Reducing idling 11 Avoiding short distances 111 Checking tyre pressure 11 Avoiding unnecessary ballast 112 Regular maintenance 112 Saving electrical energy 112 Environmental compatibility 12 The technical requirements for low fuel usage and economic efficiency of the vehicle have already been built into the vehicle at the works SKODA places a particular emphasis on minimising negative effects on the environment It is necessary to take note of the guidelines given in this chapter in order to make best use of these characteristics and to maintain their effectiveness Fuel consumption environmental pollution and the wear to the engine brakes and tyres depend essentially on the following three factors gt Your personal driving style gt Operating conditions gt Technical requirements The fuel economy by can be improved by 10 15 by always looking ahead and driving in an economical way 110 Driving Fuel consumption is also be influenced by external factors which are beyond the driver s control Consumption increases during the winter or under
263. r unleaded petrol is for example provided by the auto mobile associations Headlights The low beam of your headlights is set asymmetrically It illuminates the side of the road on which the vehicle is being driven to a greater extent When driving in countries in which the traffic drives on the other side of the road than in your home country the asymmetrical low beam may dazzle on coming drivers To prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled the headlights must be adjusted by a specialist garage FF Note For more information on adjusting the headlights consult a specialist garage CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Stabilisation control ESC 115 Antilock Braking System ABS 116 Traction Control System ASR 116 Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS 116 H WARNING a A lack of fuel can cause irregular engine running or cause the engine to shut down The brake assist systems would then be without function there is the risk of an accident a Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility weather road and traffic conditions The increased safety offered by the brake assist sys tems must not tempt you to take greater risks than otherwise there is the risk of an accident a Visit a specialist garage immediately in the event of an ABS fault Adjust your style of driving according to the damage to the ABS as you will not know how great the dama
264. red risk from the side airbag Child properly protected by safety seat AN Read and observe H on page 19 first The child must not be positioned in the area into which the side airbag will de ploy Fig 15 A There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as possible Fig 15 B E WARNING a Children must never be seated with their head in the deployment area of the side airbag there is a risk of injury Do not place any objects within the deployment area of the side airbags there is a risk of injury Classification of child seats N Read and observe H on page 19 first Classification of child seats according to the ECE R 44 standard Weight of the child up to 10 kg up to 13 kg Approximate age up to 9 months up to 18 months up to 4 years up to 7 years over 7 years 9 18 kg 15 25 kg 22 36 kg Use of child seats fastened with a seat belt A Read and observe H on page 19 first Overview of the use of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE R 16 standard Rear seat Center Front passenger Rear seats seat external 0 up to 10 kg O up to 13 kg 1 9 18 kg 2 15 25 kg 3 22 36 kg Transporting children safely 21 U Universal child seat category a child seat
265. removing and installing the number plate light and tail light make sure CL Read and observe Hj and H on page 170 first that the paintwork of the vehicle and the tail light are not damaged Bulb arrangement in the Halogen headlamp FI Note A low beam main beam and side lights a This Owner s Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is pos front turn signal light sible to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising Other light bulbs should be changed by your specialist garage We recommend that you always carry a box of replacement bulbs in the vehi cle Replacement bulbs can be purchased from SKODAOriginal Accessories 2 Parking light parking and main beam lights We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage _ after replacing a bulb in the main beam low beam or fog lights tone signal lights a Visit a specialist garage if an LED is faulty Bulb arrangement in the Halogen projector headlights 1 low beam low and main beam Fig 155 Removing bulbs for low and main beam A Read and observe H and H on page 170 first gt Remove the rubber cover A Fig 154 on page 170 170 Do it yourself gt Remove the connector from the bulb unlock the securing clip and remove the bulb Fig 155 gt Insert a new light bulb in such a way that the fixing lugs of the bulb socket fit in the recesses of the reflector gt Lock the circlip and insert th
266. ren safely Setting the seats and head restraints page 66 Examples of incorrect seated positions AN Read and observe H on page 7 first The maximum protection which seat belts can offer is only achieved if your seatbelts are fastened correctly Incorrect seated positions considerably reduce the protective functions of the seat belts and therefore increase the risk of injury due to an incorrect routing of the seat belt The driver is fully responsible for himself and passengers especially children Never allow a passenger to adopt an incorrect seated position when the car is moving The following list contains instructions which if not observed may lead to se rious injuries or death This list is not complete however we would like you to familiarise yourself with this subject Observe the following instructions while driving Do not stand up Do not stand on the seats Do not kneel on the seats Do not recline the seat backrest too far Do not lean against the dash panel Do not lie on the rear bench seat Do not sit only on the front edge of the seat Do not sit facing to the side ee ee oS KKK KR KK Do not lean out of the window Do not put your feet out of the window Do not put your feet on the dash panel Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery Do not transport somebody in the footwell Do not drive without wearing a seat belt Do not sit in the luggage compartment Passive Safety 9
267. rged quantity of carbon dioxide in grams per driven kilometer NI Panel van intended exclusively or mainly for the transporta tion of goods Newton meter measuring unit for the engine torque TDI CR Diesel engine with turbocharging and common rail injection system Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection Abbreviations 5 Safety CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Before every journey Driving safety Safety equipment In this section you will find important information tips and notes on the sub ject of passive safety in your vehicle We have combined everything here which you should be familiar with for ex ample regarding seat belts airbags child seats and safety of children E WARNING a This chapter contains important information on how to use the vehicle for the driver and his occupants a You will find further information on safety which concerns you and those travelling with you in the following chapters of this Owner s Manual The complete on board literature should always be in the vehicle This applies in particular if you rent out or sell the vehicle Before every journey QN Read and observe H on page 6 first For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you please pay attention to the following points before setting off ooo J Ensure that the lighting and the turn signal system are functioning proper ly
268. rip memory collates the driving information from the moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off New data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ignition If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours the memory is automatically erased Total trip memory memory 2 The total trip memory collates the data from any number of individual trips up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 1999 km or for vehicles with a MAXI DOT display 99 hours and 59 minutes or 9999 km The memory is deleted when either of these limits is reached and the calculation starts all over again Unlike the single trip memory the total trip memory is not deleted after a pe riod of interruption of driving of 2 hours 1 Note All information in the memory 1 and 2 is erased if the battery of the vehicle is disconnected Instruments and Indicator Lights 29 Operation Fig 22 Multifunction display Control el ements a A Read and observe H on page 29 first The Toggle button for selecting menu items A Fig 22 and button B are found on the wiper stalk Select menu items gt Briefly press the top or bottom of rocker switch A Fig 22 This opens the individual menu items in the multifunction display one after the other Select memory gt Press button B Fig 22 Reset memory gt Select the desired memory gt Pr
269. rney if for some reason it is not possible to top up the engine oil under the current conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage Do not drive on if the oil level is above range A Fig 128 on page 143 Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage EE CAUTION Do not pour any additives into the engine oil there is a risk of serious engine damage Note Before a long drive we recommend that you purchase and carry with you en gine oil which complies with the specification for your vehicle We recommend that you use oils from KODA Original Accessories a You must wash yourself thoroughly if your skin has come into contact with oil Specifications and capacity A Read and observe H and H on page 142 first Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with flexible service intervals 1 2 litres 44 kW VW 503 00 VW 504 00 1 2 1 51 kW VW 503 00 VW 504 00 VW 503 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 VW 504 00 1 4 1 63 kW 1 4 1 132 kW TSI 1 2 1 63 kW TSI 1 2 1 77 kW TSI Diesel Diesel engines lt Specification ee level 1 2 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 1 6 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a DPF Specifications and capacity in I for vehicles with fixed service intervals Petrol Pe
270. rrent fuel consumption The current fuel consumption level is displayed in litres 100 km You can use this information to adapt your driving style to the desired fuel consumption The display appears in litres hour if the vehicle is stationary or driving at a low speed Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the memory was last erased is displayed in litres 100 km Set the memory to zero at the start of a new measurement if you wish to de termine the average fuel consumption over a certain period page 30 Opera tion No value will appear in the display after it has been erased until you have driven approximately 300 m The display is updated regularly while you are driving Range The estimated range is displayed in kilometres It indicates the distance you can still drive with your vehicle based on the level of fuel in the tank and the same style of driving The display is shown in steps of 10 km The value is displayed in steps of 5 km after the warning light has come on The fuel consumption over the preceding 50 km is used to calculate the infor mation The range will increase if you drive in a more economical manner If the memory is set to zero after the battery has been disconnected a fuel consumption of 10 1 100 km is used initially then the value is adapted accord ing to the style of driving Distance travelled The distance travelled since the memory was last erased is displayed Reset
271. rrupted 126 Driving Always switch off the anti theft alarm system before a trailer is coupled or un coupled page 49 Conditions for including a trailer in the anti theft alarm system J The vehicle is factory fitted with an anti theft alarm system and towing equipment J The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by means of the trailer socket v The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer is functional J The vehicle is locked with the vehicle key and the anti theft alarm system is activated Note For technical reasons trailers with rear LED lights cannot be connected to the anti theft alarm system General Maintenance CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects SKODA Original Parts 127 SKODA Original Accessories 128 Spoiler 128 Airbags 128 The instructions and guidelines issued by SKODA AUTO a s must be observed when making any modifications repairs or technical changes to your vehicle Compliance with these guidelines and instructions is in the interest of the roadworthiness and technical condition of your vehicle The vehicle will comply with road traffic regulations following the modifications repairs and technical changes Always consult a SKODA Partner before buying accessories or parts or before carrying out any modifications repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle D WARNING a Work not properly performed on yo
272. rtment cover Stowed in the lower position behind the rear seats Ql Read and observe H and M on page 70 first The luggage compartment cover can be fitted to the following positions gt In the lower position on the support elements Fig 65 A H gt Behind the rear seats Fig 65 B 72 Using the system EE CAUTION In this position Fig 65 A the luggage compartment cover is designed for small objects up to a weight of 2 5 kg Retractable luggage compartment cover Fabia Estate B5J 0499 Fig 66 Boot foldable boot cover removing foldable boot cover A Read and observe H and H on page 70 first Pulling out gt Pull the retractable luggage compartment cover in direction of arrow 1 Fig 66 as far as the stop into the secured position Retracting gt Press the cover in the handle area in the direction of the arrow 2 and the cover automatically rolls up into position Removing gt The fully folded luggage compartment cover can be removed to transport bulky goods by pressing on the side of the cross rod in the direction of the arrow 3 and taking it out by moving it in the direction of the arrow 4 E WARNING No objects should be placed on the foldable boot cover CO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Dividing up the luggage compartment with variable loading floor 73 Removing and refitting the variable loading floor 73 Remov
273. rve H on page 35 first The warning light comes on when the cruise control is operat ing page 118 Ql Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light lights up operate the brake pedal This is necessary to be able to move the selector lever from position P or N page 107 Ql Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light gt comes on when the main beam or headlight flasher are selected page 58 42 Using the system This chapter contains information on the following subjects Vehicle key 42 Replacing the battery in the remote control key 43 Child safety lock 44 Opening closing the door 44 Locking unlocking the vehicle without central locking 45 Emergency locking of the doors 45 Fig 25 Key without with remote control Two keys are provided with the vehicle Depending on the equipment your ve hicle can be equipped with keys without radio remote control Fig 25 A or with radio remote control Fig 25 B E WARNING Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle Unauthor ized persons such as children for example could lock the car turn on the ignition or start the engine there is the danger of injury and accidents oc curring When leaving the vehicle never leave people who are not completely in dependent such as children unattended in the vehicle The children might for example release the handbrake or take the vehicle
274. s there is a risk of an accident and serious injury Airbags A Read and observe H on page 127 first The system components for the airbag system may be found in the front bumper doors front seats the roof lining or in the bodywork E WARNING Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of system components due to other repair work e g removal of the steering wheel must only be carried out by a specialist garage Adjustments repairs and modifications which have been carried out un professionally can cause damage operational faults and can also seriously impair the effectiveness of airbag system there is the risk of an accident and fatal injury The airbag system must be replaced if an airbag has been deployed Air bag modules cannot be repaired E WARNING Observe the following instructions for the airbag system a It is prohibited to tamper with individual parts of the airbag system as this might result in the airbag being deployed Never install any airbag parts into the vehicle that have been removed from old cars or have been recycled Never fit damaged airbag parts to a vehicle The airbags may then not be triggered properly or not at all in the event of an accident No modifications of any kind must be made to parts of the airbag system E WARNING A change in the suspension of the vehicle including the use of non ap proved wheels and tyre combinations can alter the function
275. s e g screws or nails from the tyre The breakdown kit must not be used under the following circumstances gt There is damage to the rim gt The outside temperature is less than 20 C gt The tears or punctures are greater than 4 mm in size gt There is damage to the tyre wall gt Driving with very low tyre pressure or with a completely flat tyre gt If the use by date see inflation bottle has passed Emergency equipment and self help 161 E WARNING A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a stand ard tyre Do not travel faster than 80 km h a Avoid accelerating at full throttle sharp braking and fast cornering Check the tyre pressure after driving for 10 minutes a The sealant is hazardous to heath Remove immediately if it comes into contact with the skin For the sake of the environment Used sealant or sealant whose expiry date has passed must be disposed of in accordance with environmental protection regulations Note Observe the manufacturer s usage instructions for the breakdown kit Anew bottle of sealant can be purchased from KODA Original Parts Immediately replace the wheel that was repaired using the breakdown kit or consult a specialist garage about repair possibilities Breakdown kit Fig 145 Principle sketch Components of the breakdown kit N Read and observe H on page 162 first The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the l
276. s normal operat ing temperature Wear and tear and pollutant emissions though are particu larly high in the warming up phase Therefore start driving as soon as the en gine has started In this case high engine speeds should be avoided Avoiding short distances 1 100km Fig 110 Principle sketch Fuel consump tion in 1 100 km at different tem peratures N Read and observe M on page 110 first Short distances result in an above average high fuel consumption We there fore recommend avoiding distances of less than 4 km if the engine is cold A cold engine consumes the most fuel immediately after the start Fuel con sumption drops to 10 litres 100 km after just 1 kilometre The consumption sta bilises once the engine and catalytic converter have reached their operating temperature An important factor in this connection is also the ambient temperature The graph Fig 110 shows the different levels of fuel consumption after driving a certain distance at a temperature of 20 C and a temperature of 10 C Checking tyre pressure N Read and observe M on page 110 first Tyres which are correctly inflated save fuel Starting off and Driving 111 Always ensure the tyre inflation pressure is correct If the pressure is too low the tyres will have to overcome a higher rolling resistance This will not only increase fuel consumption but also tyre wear and the driving behaviour will worsen Always check the tyre inflation
277. s of the brake pads must also be checked by a specialist garage between services Wet roads or road salt The performance of the brakes can be delayed as the brake discs and brake pads may be moist or have a coating of ice or layer of salt on them in winter The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Corrosion Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the bake pads occur if the vehicle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the braking system The brakes are cleaned and dried by applying the brakes several times Faults in the brake surface If it is found that the braking distance has suddenly become longer and that the brake pedal can be depressed further the brake system may be faulty Visit a specialist garage immediately and adjust your style of driving appropri ately as you will not know how great the damage is Low brake fluid level An insufficient level of brake fluid may result in problems in the brake system The level of the brake fluid is monitored electronically page 36 Brake sys tem Brake booster The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal The brake booster only operates when the engine is running Handbrake Fig 103 Handbrake J e A Read and observe H and H on page 104 first Apply gt Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards Releasing gt Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push i
278. s of the soot particles in the filter a Using diesel fuel with an increased sulphur content can considerably reduce the service life of the filter A SKODA Service Partner will be able to tell you which countries use diesel fuel with a high sulphur content a f the engine is turned off during the filter cleaning process or shortly after wards the cooling fan may turn on automatically for a few minutes Hd Fuel reserve A Read and observe H on page 35 first The indicator light i will come on if the fuel level is less than 7 litres An audible signal sounds as a warning signal The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Please refuel Range km Note The text in the MAXI DOT display only goes out after the vehicle has been re fuelled and driven a short distance t Airbag system N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light amp lights up there is a fault in the airbag system The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Error Airbag The operational capability of the airbag system is monitored electronically even if one of the airbags is switched off If a front side or head airbag or belt tensioner has been switched off using the vehicle system tester gt The warning light comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then flashes for approximately another 12 seconds at 2 sec ond intervals The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT displa
279. s the risk of an accident and serious injury a Slipping loads can significantly affect the stability and safety of the vehi cle trailer combination there is the risk of an accident and serious injury Towing a trailer QN Read and observe H on page 125 first Exterior mirrors You have to have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the traffic behind the trailer with the standard rear view mirrors National legal requirements must be observed Headlights The front of the vehicle can be lifted when a trailer is being towed and the headlights can dazzle other road users Adjust the headlight setting on the headlight range control page 57 Head light beam adjustment Driving speed For safety reasons do not drive faster than 80 km h when towing a trailer Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the trailer is detected Never attempt to stop the trailer from swaying by acceler ating Brakes Apply the brakes in good time If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake apply the brakes gently at first then brake firmly This will avoid brake jolts resulting from the trailer wheels locking Towing atrailer 125 On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a brake Engine overheating The speed must be reduced immediately if the needle for the coolant tempera ture gauge moves into the right hand area or the red area of the scale St
280. s user manual of the child Seat E WARNING a It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if you are using a child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is carried with its back facing the direction of travel page 17 Deactivating airbags Never use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel if the airbag is switched on This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of the front passenger airbag The airbag may cause the child severe or even fatal injuries in the event of it being deployed a This fact is also indicated by the label that can be found in one of the fol lowing locations On the B column on the front passenger side Fig 13 The sticker is visible when opening the front passenger door On the front passenger s sun visor In some countries the sticker is lo cated on the front seat passenger s sun visor Fig 14 In the case of Group 2 or 3 child seats make sure that the deflector pulley mounted on the child seat headrest is in front of or level with the pulley on the B pillar on the passenger side The front passenger airbag should be switched on again once the child seat in which the child is transported with the back to the direction of trav el is no longer in use on the passenger seat Child safety and side airbag Fig 15 Incorrect seated position of a child who is not properly secu
281. sing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec onds the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down by several centimetres If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be ing moved down for the second time even though the obstacle was not yet been removed the closing process is only stopped During this time it is not possible to automatically close the window The force limiter is still switched on The force limiter is only switched off if you attempt to close the window again within the next 10 seconds the window will now close with full force If you wait longer than 10 seconds the force limiter is switched on again Window convenience operation A Read and observe H and M on page 52 first The comfort controls of the windows provide the ability to open or close all the windows at once Opening can take place in one of the following ways Opening gt Press the button on the remote control key and hold gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the unlock position gt Hold button A Fig 37 on page 52 in the opening position Closing gt Press the amp button on the remote control key and hold gt Hold the key in the driver s lock in the lock position gt Hold Button A Fig 37 on page 52 in the closing position The movement of the window is
282. sitive terminal of the battery must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehicle there is a risk of short circuit Do not clamp the jump start cable to the negative terminal of the dis charged battery There is the risk of detonating gas seeping out the battery being ignited by the strong spark which results from the engine being star ted Route the jump start cables so that they cannot be caught by any rotat ing parts in the engine compartment Do not bend over the battery there is a risk of caustic burns The vent screws of the battery cells must be tightened firmly Keep any sources of ignition naked flame smouldering cigarettes etc away from the battery risk of explosion Never jump start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low risk of explosion and caustic burns CAUTION There must not be any contact between the two vehicles otherwise current may flow as soon as the negative terminals are connected The discharged battery must be properly connected to the system of the ve hicle We recommend you buy jump start cables from a car battery specialist 164 Do it yourself Jump starting using the battery from another vehicle Fig 146 Jump starting A flat battery B battery providing current A Read and observe H and on page 164 first The battery of another vehicle can be used to jump start your vehicle if the en gine will not star
283. ssible by intermittent braking Only apply the brakes for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the traffic conditions permit this Do not place any other road users in jeopardy TE CAUTION a When driving through water some parts of the vehicle such as the engine gearbox chassis or electrics can be severely damaged Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis sible water level for your vehicle Potholes mud or rocks can be hidden under the water making it difficult or impossible to drive through the body of water Do not drive through salt water The salt can lead to corrosion Any vehicle parts that have come into contact with salt water must be rinsed immediately with fresh water FF Note We recommend that the vehicle is checked by a specialist garage after it has been driven through water CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Unleaded petrol YS Headlights 114 In certain countries it may be possible that the SKODA service partner net work is limited or has not been established This is the reason why procuring certain spare parts may be somewhat complicated and specialist garages may only be able to make limited repairs 114 Driving Unleaded petrol A vehicle fitted with a petrol engine must always be refuelled with unleaded petrol page 137 Unleaded petrol Information regarding the locations of fill ing stations that offe
284. stalled external aerial and a maximum transmission power of up to 10 watts Please consult a SKODA Partner for information about the possibility of instal ling and operating mobile phones and two way radio systems with a transmis sion power of more than 10 W Operating mobile phones or two way radio systems may interfere with the functionality of the electronic systems in your vehicle The possible reasons for this are gt no external aerial gt external aerial incorrectly installed gt transmission power greater than 10 watts E WARNING Concentrate fully at all times on your driving As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle Only use the device in a way that you are in full control of your vehicle in every traffic situation there is the risk of accidents Communication and multimedia 93 E WARNING Continued The national regulations for using a mobile phone in a vehicle must be observed If a mobile phone or a two way radio system is operated in a vehicle with out an external aerial or an external aerial which has been installed incor rectly this can increase the strength of the electromagnetic field inside the vehicle Two way radio systems mobile phones or mounts must not be installed on airbag covers or within the immediate deployment range of the airbags Never leave a mobile phone on a seat on the dash panel or in another area from which it can be thrown during a
285. sudden braking manoeuvre an accident or a collision risk of injury a The Bluetooth function must be switched off by a specialist workshop before the vehicle is transported by air Note a We recommend that mobile phones and two way radio systems be installed in the a vehicle by a specialist workshop Not all mobile phones that enable Bluetooth communication are compatible with the universal telephone preinstallation GSM II You can ask a KODA Part ner whether your telephone is compatible with the GSM II universal telephone fitting The range of the Bluetooth connection to the hands free system is restric ted to the vehicle interior The range is dependent on local factors e g obsta cles between the devices and mutual interferences with other devices If your mobile phone is in a jacket pocket for example this can lead to difficulties when establishing a connection with the hands free system or transferring data Introductory information The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II hands free system includes a convenience mode for the mobile phone via voice control the multifunction steering wheel the adapter radio or the navigation system The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II comprises the following func tions gt Phone Phonebook page 94 gt Convenience operation of the telephone via the multifunction steering wheel page 95 94 Using the system gt Managing telephone calls via th
286. support straps 1 Fig 64 gt Remove the cover from the holders 2 by lightly knocking on the underside of the cover in the area between the holders Installing the cover gt Place the cover on the contact surfaces of the side trim panel gt Place the recesses of the cover 3 Fig 64 over the holders 2 in the side trim panel gt Interlock the cover by lightly knocking on the top side of the cover in the area between the holders gt Hook the support straps 1 on the boot lid Seats and storage 71 HU WARNING No objects should be placed on the boot cover the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sudden braking or the vehicle collides with some thing EE CAUTION a When closing the boot lid jamming and damage to the luggage compartment cover or the side trim panel can occur if handled in an unprofessional way The following guidelines must be observed a The recesses in the cover 3 Fig 64 must lock in the holders in the side trim panel 2 a The items which are transported must not exceed the height of the lug gage compartment cover The cover must not be jammed in the seal of the boot lid when it is in the opened position There must be no object in the gap between the opened cover and the rear backrest F Note Opening the boot lid also lifts up the boot cover Further positions of the luggage compartment cover LEDE an Hi b As N Fig 65 The luggage compa
287. switched on the function displayed is the one which you last selected before switching off the ignition The multifunction display shown in the segment display Fig 21 on page 29 or in the MAXI DOT display depending on your vehicle model page 33 On vehicles with a MAXI DOT display page 33 there is an option not to dis play some of the information EN WARNING a Concentrate fully on your driving at all times As the driver you are fully responsible for the operation of your vehicle Even at temperatures of around 4 C there may still be black ice on the road surface You should therefore not rely solely on the outside tempera ture display for accurate information as to whether there is ice on the road EF Note a In certain national versions the displays appear in the Imperial system of measures a f the display of the second speed is activated in mph the current speed is not indicated in km h on the display Fig 21 Multifunction display oa I Read and observe H on page 29 first The multifunction display is equipped with two automatic memories The se lected memory is shown in the Display Fig 21 The data of the single trip memory memory 1 is shown if a1 appears in the display A 2 shown in the display means that data relates to the total distance memory memory 2 Switch memories using button B Fig 22 on page 30 on the windscreen wiper stalk Single trip memory memory 1 The single t
288. t and then the right backrest gt Push the net partition housing A Fig 72 in the direction of the arrow 1 and remove it from the mount on the right seat back in the direction of the arrow 2 Fitting gt Insert the recesses on the net partition housing into the mounts on the rear seat backrests gt Push the net partition housing in the opposite direction of the arrow 1 as far as the stop gt Fold the rear seats back into their original position Seats and storage 75 This chapter contains information on the following subjects Install cross member 76 Install bicycle carrier 76 Put bicycle into the bicycle carrier 77 Secure the stability of the bicycles with a belt 77 E WARNING When transporting bicycles ensuring the safety of the passengers is para mount EE CAUTION Take care handling the bicycle there is a risk of damaging the vehicle Fig 73 Install cross member A Read and observe H and M on page 76 first gt Remove the rollable luggage compartment cover page 72 if necessary we recommend you remove the net partition page 75 gt Remove the head rests from the rear seat rests and fold the rear seats for ward page 67 gt Undo the securing screws C Fig 73 and remove a little to unlock the re tainers B gt Place the cross member A with the fixed part onto the left lashing eye and then place it on the right lashing eye with the removable part of the
289. t because the battery is flat Jump start cables are required for this purpose The jump start cables must be attached in the following sequence gt Attach clamp 1 to the positive terminal of the discharged battery A Fig 146 gt Attach clamp 2 to the positive terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach clamp 3 to the negative terminal of the battery supplying power B gt Attach the clamp 4 to a solid metal component firmly connected to the en gine block or to the engine block itself Starting engine gt Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle gt Start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery gt If the engine does not start halt the attempt to start the engine after 10 sec onds and wait for 30 seconds before repeating the process gt Disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse order to the one described above Both batteries must have a rated voltage of 12 V The capacity Ah of the bat tery supplying the power must not be significantly less than the capacity of the discharged battery in your vehicle Jump start cables Only use jump start cables which have an adequately large cross section and insulated terminal clamps Obey the instructions of the jump start cable manu facturer Positive cable colour coding in the majority of cases is red Negative cable colour coding in the majority of cases is black Jump starting in vehicles with t
290. t comes on if the brake fluid level in the braking system is too low or there is a fault in the ABS The following message is shown in the MAXI DOT display Q Brake fluid Log book Stop the vehicle switch off the engine and check the level of the brake flu id page 146 Further information page 103 Brakes H WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning light system page 60 The following guidelines should be observed when opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level page 139 Engine compartment a If the warning light is displayed simultaneously with warning light page 38 Antilock brake system ABS do not continue your journey Seek help from a specialist garage A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi cle s braking distance there is a risk of accident A Seat belt warning light N Read and observe H on page 35 first The amp indicator light comes on after the ignition is switched on as a reminder for the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belt The indicator light only goes out once the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belt A steady warning signal sounds at vehicle speeds greater than 20 km h and the A flashes if the driver and front passenger have not fastened their seat belts The warning signa
291. t garage oo Glow plug system diesel engine A Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light o gt comes on after the ignition has been switched on The engine can be started immediately after the pre glow warning light goes out There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light 07 does not come on at all or lights up continuously If the warning light o gt begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage PC EPC fault light petrol engine N Read and observe H on page 35 first If the warning light EPC comes on or begins to flash while driving a fault exists in the engine control unit The engine control unit allows the vehicle to run in emergency mode Seek help from a specialist garage Diesel particulate filter diesel engine N Read and observe H on page 35 first The diesel particulate filter separates the soot particles from the exhaust The soot particles collect in the diesel particulate filter where they are burnt ona regular basis The warning light comes on if soot has accumulated in the filter Instruments and Indicator Lights 39 In order to clean the filter and where traffic conditions permit I the vehicle should be driven for at least 15 minutes or until the warning light goes out with the 4th or 5th gear automatic gearbox in position S engaged at
292. t in the process of changing gear do not leave your hand on the gearshift lever while driving The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mech anism to wear excessively Pedals The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances Starting off and Driving 105 In the driver s footwell only a footmat which is attached to the two corre sponding attachment points may be used Only use factory supplied footmats or footmats from the range of SKODAOrigi nal Accessories which are fitted to two attachment points E WARNING No objects are allowed in the driver s footwell there is a risk of obstruct ing or restriction pedal operation CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Modes and use of selector lever 106 Manual gear shifting Tiptronic 107 Starting off and driving 108 Malfunction 108 Selector lever emergency unlocking 109 E WARNING Do not depress the accelerator if the forward driving mode is changed when the vehicle is halted and the engine is running there is a risk of an accident a Never shift the selector lever to R or P modes when driving there is a risk of an accident The vehicle must be held on the brake pedal in D S or R modes if the ve hicle is halted and the engine is running Even when the engine is idling power transmission is never completely interrupted the vehicle will creep 1 Only valid for some countries
293. t slight ly as you do this gt Remove the lamp gt Remove the faulty bulb from the holder and insert a new one gt Replace the glass cover and push in until the stop Make sure that you install the glass cover in the correct position Rear light Fig 163 Tail light assembly Bulb ar rangement A Read and observe H and on page 170 first Bulb location Fig 163 1 Rear fog light Reversing light 2 Turn signal lights 3 Brake lights 4 parking lights Removing and installing the tail light gt Open the tailgate gt Hold the rear light assembly still with one hand and unscrew the plastic nut Fig 162 A with the other gt Grip the tail lamp assembly and carefully remove it by pulling it back at an an gle with loosening movements Do not pull the grommet with the cables out of the bodywork Fuses and light bulbs 173 gt To refit the rear light assembly first insert screw A into the opening in the bodywork Fig 162 gt Carefully press the tail light assembly into the bodywork so that the bolts latch with the mounts in the body gt Hold the rear light assembly still with one hand and attach and tighten the nuts Fig 162 A with the other hand Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly gt To replace the bulb turn the bulb holder anti clockwise to the stop and re move it from the housing Fig 163 gt Replace the bulb insert the holder with the bu
294. t the approval of the manufacturer is excluded from the Service schedule warranty SKODA Original Parts A Read and observe H on page 127 first We recommend the use of SKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle since these parts are approved by KODA AUTO a s They correspond exactly to KODA AUTO a s specifications in respect of design dimensional accuracy and materi al and are identical to the components used in the batch production KODA AUTO a s can guarantee the safety suitability and long life of these products We therefore recommend that you only use SKODA Genuine Parts KODA AUTO a s supplies the market with a complete range of KODA Genu ine Parts not only while the model is still in production but with wear and tear parts for at least 15 years after the end of series production and with all other vehicle parts for at least 10 years SKODA service partners are liable for any defects in SKODA original parts for a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with materials defect liability under the law unless otherwise agreed in the purchase agreement You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these components for this period so that the commencement of the warranty term may be verified Body repairs SKODA vehicles are designed so that if the body suffers damage it is only nec essary to replace those parts which are in fact damaged Carcare 127 Before you decide to have damaged body par
295. tched off Windscreen washer system Fig 127 Engine compartment Wind screen washer fluid reservoir r 1 s B5J 0540 A Read and observe H and H on page 139 first The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compart ment Fig 127 This contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen or rear window and for the headlight cleaning system The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 5 litres or about 5 4 litres on vehicles that have a headlight cleaning system Inspecting and replenishing 141 Clear water is not sufficient to intensively clean the windscreen and head lights We recommend using clean washing water together with the screen cleaner from the range of SKODA Original Accessories in winter additionally with antifreeze which is capable of removing stubborn dirt The washing water should always be mixed with antifreeze in winter even if the vehicle has heated windscreen washer nozzles Under exceptional circumstances methylated spirits can also be used if no screen cleaner with antifreeze is available The concentration of methylated spirits must not be more than 15 The freeze protection at this concentration is sufficient only to 5 C CAUTION Under no circumstances must radiator antifreeze or other additives be added to the windscreen washer fluid a If the vehicle is fitted with a headlight cleaning system only cleaning prod ucts which do not attack the polycarbonate coating
296. tenance A Read and observe H and on page 147 first The battery is located in the engine compartment below a plastic box Fig 131 gt Open the cover in the direction of the arrow Fig 131 The installation of the battery cover on the positive terminal side takes place in the reverse order Checking the battery electrolyte level Fig 132 Vehicle battery Electrolyte level indicator 00O JE EEF AOA 7 ga o z A a a AN Read and observe H and H on page 147 first On vehicles with a vehicle battery fitted with a colour indicator Fig 132 the electrolyte level can be determined by looking at the change in colour Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator For this reason carefully knock on the indicator before carrying out the check gt Black colour electrolyte level is correct gt Colourless or light yellow colour electrolyte level too low the battery must be replaced Vehicles with a START STOP system are fitted with a battery control unit for checking the energy level for the recurring engine start We recommend you have the electrolyte level checked by a specialist garage from time to time especially in the following cases gt High external temperatures gt Longer day trips gt After each charge Winter time The vehicle battery only has some of its starting power at low temperatures A discharged vehicle battery may freeze at temperatures just below 0 C We theref
297. tening elements are found in the luggage compart ment Fig 61 A Lashing eyes for fastening items of luggage and fixing nets Fastening elements for fastening fixing nets EE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the lashing eyes is 3 5 KN 350 kg FF Note The upper front lashing eyes are located underneath the folding rear seat backrest Fig 61 Folding hooks Fig 62 Boot folding hooks QO Read and observe H and M on page 70 first Folding hooks for attaching small items of luggage such as bags etc are pro vided on both sides of the boot Fig 62 E CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7 5 kg Fixing nets B5J 0496 Fig 63 Fixing net double horizontal pocket floor fixing net double verti cal pockets A Read and observe H and on page 70 first Fixing examples for a fixing net as a horizontal pocket floor fixing net Fig 63 A and a horizontal pocket Fig 63 B Ey WARNING Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of the fixing nets Heavy ob jects are not secured adequately there is a risk of injury LE CAUTION The maximum permissible load of the fixing nets is 1 5 kg Do not place any sharp objects in the nets risk of damaging the net Boot cover B5J 0497 Fig 64 Removing the boot cover CQ Read and observe H and on page 70 first The boot cover can be removed if you wish to transport bulky goods Removing cover gt Unhook
298. the arrow 2 and the bonnet is un locked gt Grab hold of the bonnet and lift gt Take the bonnet prop out of its bracket and secure the opened bonnet by in serting the end of the prop in the opening 3 Fig 125 provided Closing gt Lift the bonnet slightly and unhook the bonnet support Press the bonnet prop into the bracket provided gt Let the bonnet drop into the lock carrier lock from a height of around 20 cm do not push it in E WARNING Check that the bonnet is closed properly TE CAUTION Never open the bonnet by the locking lever Fig 124 Engine compartment overview B5J 0539 Fig 126 Principle sketch Engine compartment A Read and observe H and on page 139 first Explanation of graphic Fig 126 Coolant expansion reservoir 145 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 141 Engine oil filler opening 144 Engine oil dipstick 143 Brake fluid reservoir 146 Vehicle battery 146 or gt gt Es 5 1 In some countries 5 4 Itr applies for both variants FF Note The location of the inspection points in the engine compartment of petrol and diesel engines is practically identical Radiator fan A Read and observe H and on page 139 first The radiator fan is powered by an electric motor Operation is controlled ac cording to the temperature of the coolant HU WARNING The fan can intermittently continue to run for approximately 10 minutes af ter the ignition is swi
299. the front seats Behind the rear seats Removing and refitting the housing 0 Oil see Engine oil Oil pressure Display messages Onboard computer see Multifunction display Operating weight Operation in winter Diesel fuel Vehicle battery Outside temperature Overview Engine compartment warning lights 188 Index 143 36 29 175 138 148 30 141 35 p Paintwork See Caring for paintwork Parking Parking aid Parking lights 131 W7 56 Part replacement Passive safety Before every journey 127 driving safety Safety equipment Passive Safety naAA Payload Pedals Footmats Petrol refer to Fuel Polishing the paintwork See Vehicle care Power window force limiter 175 105 105 137 131 53 R Radiator fan Radio reception See windows Raise vehicle Rear view mirror Exterior mirrors Manually dimmed rear view mirror Rear fog light Rear window Heating Recirculated air mode Manual air conditioning Recommended gear Refuelling Fuel Remote control Synchronisation process 141 132 160 65 65 59 62 90 28 137 137 48 49 Remote control key Replacing the battery 43 Repairs and technical alterations 127 Replacing Vehicle battery 149 Wi
300. the stop gt Unlock the lock 3 under the trim in the direction of arrow 2 gt Open the tailgate CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Opening closing the windows 52 Power window force limiter 53 Window convenience operation 53 Operational faults 53 Unlocking and locking 51 E WARNING a f the vehicle is locked from the outside do not leave anybody in the vehi cle as it is not possible to open the windows from the inside in the event of an emergency a The system is fitted with a force limiter page 53 If there is an obsta cle the closing process is stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres The windows should nevertheless be closed carefully risk of injury Deactivating the electrically operated power windows in the rear doors is recommended safety push button S when children are being transported in the rear seats Fig 37 on page 52 Proceed with caution when closing windows to avoid causing crushing in juries there is a risk of injury EE CAUTION Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric windows a Should the windows freeze first remove the ice page 132 Windows and exterior mirrors and only then operate the power windows Otherwise the window seal and the power window mechanism could be damaged a In the winter ice on the window may cause greater resistance as the win dow is closed Th
301. the windscreen beforehand Otherwise the window cleaner could freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea sons These can be purchased from a SKODA Partner EE CAUTION In cold temperatures and during the winter check before the journey or be fore switching on the ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen If the windscreen wipers are switched on when the blades are fro zen to the windscreen this may damage both the blades and windscreen wip er motor a f the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are switched on the windscreen wipers will continue wiping in the same mode after the igni tion is turned back on The windscreen wipers could freeze up in cold tempera tures between the time the ignition was turned off and when it was turned back on again a Carefully detach frozen wiper blades from the front or rear window Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving a f the windscreen wipers are handled carelessly there is a risk of damage to the windscreen J Note The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en gine is running and the outside temperature is less than approx 10 C a The content of the windscreen washer fluid reservoir is 3 5 litres On vehicles fitted with the headlight cleaning system the volume is around 5 4 litres The wipe
302. tion Some clothing materials such as dark denim do not have sufficient colour fastness This can cause damage or clearly visible discolouration to seat covers even when treated correctly This is particularly true for light coloured uphols tery This is not a defect in the seat cover but poor colour fastness of the clothing textiles Note During the life of the vehicle minor visible changes can occur on the leather parts of the covers e g wrinkles or creases as a result of the stress of the cov ers Synthetic leather fabrics and Alcantara N Read and observe H and on page 133 first Synthetic leather Clean the synthetic leather with a damp cloth If the synthetic leather does not come completely clean with this method a mild soap solution or specific cleaning agent must be used Fabrics Clean upholstery cover materials and cloth trims on doors boot cover etc us ing specific cleaning agents e g dry foam Use a soft sponge brush or commercially available microfibre cloth Use a cloth and special detergent to clean the headlining Remove pilling and residues on upholstery with a brush Remove stubborn hair with a cleaning glove Alcantara Dust and fine dirt particles in pores creases and seams may chafe and damage the surface If you leave your vehicle parked in the open for lengthy periods protect the Al cantara seat upholstery from direct sunlight to prevent fading Minor changes in colour
303. tion 1 In Germany also DIN 51628 in Austria NORM C 1590 in Russia GOST R 52368 2005 EN 590 2004 2 In Germany complying with standard DIN 52638 in Austria NORM C 1590 in France EN 590 138 General Maintenance Diesel fuel A Read and observe H and H on page 136 first The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that meets the EN 590 standard All diesel engines can be operated using diesel fuel with a maximum of 7 bi odiesel B7 Operation in winter Winter grade diesel fuel In the cold season only use winter grade diesel fuel which will still operate properly even at a temperature of 20 C It is often the case in countries with different climatic conditions that diesel fuels available have a different temperature characteristic SKODA Partners and filling stations in the relevant country will be able to provide you with in formation regarding the diesel fuels available Diesel fuel additives Additives so called flow improvers petrol and similar agents should not be mixed with the diesel fuel This can cause serious damage to engine or ex haust system parts EE CAUTION a Just filling the tank once with diesel fuel that does not comply with the Standard can cause severe damage to parts of the engine the fuel and ex haust system f a fuel other than diesel fuel complying with the standards referred to above e g petrol is used by mistake do not start the engine or switch on the i
304. tion This chapter contains information on the following subjects Music playback via Bluetooth 99 Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel 100 AUX and MDI inputs 101 Music playback via Bluetooth The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II makes it possible to play back music via Bluetooth from the devices such as MP3 player mobile phone or notebook To ensure the music can be played back via Bluetooth you must first pair the device with the hands free system in the Phone Bluetooth Media player menu The music playback process is performed on the connected device The universal telephone preinstallation GSM II ensures that the music played back via the hands free system can be controlled with the remote con trol page 99 Voice commands FF Note The device being connected must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile refer to the operating instructions for the relevant device being connected Communication and multimedia 99 Operating the radio and navigation system on the multifunction steering wheel Fig 101 Multifunction steering wheel Control buttons and wheel BNH 0004 The multifunction steering wheel has buttons for operating the basic func tions of factory fitted radio and navigation system Fig 101 Button adjust The radio and navigation system can of course still be operated on the devices A description is included in the relevant operati
305. tion the intensity of the wind noise is much less FF Note When the sliding tilting roof is in the comfort position the intensity of the wind noise is reduced Comfort operation AN Read and observe H and F on page 54 first An open sliding tilting roof can also be closed from the outside gt Press the amp button on the remote control key and hold or hold the key in the lock cylinder of the driver s door in the locked position H The closing operation stops immediately when you release the key or the lock button E WARNING Close the sliding tilting roof carefully risk of injury The force limiter does not operate with the convenience closing Emergency operation B5J 0490 Fig 39 Point for positioning screwdriver opening for positioning the key A Read and observe H and on page 54 first The sliding tilting roof can be closed or opened manually if the system is faul ty The emergency operation of the sliding roof is located underneath the glasses storage box 1 page 83 Glasses storage box gt Open the glasses storage box gt Carefully insert an approximately 5 mm wide screwdriver into the slot in the positions shown by the arrows 1 Fig 39 gt Carefully fold the glasses storage box downwards by gently pressing down and turning the screwdriver gt Insert an Allen key SW 4 up to the stop into the opening 2 and close or open the sliding tilting roof gt Reinstall the glasses storag
306. tion of all plastic parts in accordance with VDA Recommendation 260 gt Reduced fuel consumption and exhaust emission CO2 gt Minimum fuel leakage during accidents gt Reduced noise Choice of materials gt Extensive use of recyclable material gt Air conditioning filled with CFC free refrigerant gt No cadmium gt No asbestos gt Reduction in the vaporisation of plastics Manufacture gt Solvent free cavity protection gt Solvent free protection of the vehicle for transportation from the production plant to the customer gt The use of solvent free adhesives gt No CFCs used in the production process gt Without use of mercury gt Use of water soluble paints Trade in and recycling of old cars SKODA meets the requirements of the brand and its products with regard to protecting the environment and the preserving resources All new SKODA ve hicles can be utilized up to 95 and always be returned In a lot of countries sufficient trade in networks have been created where you can trade in your vehicle After you trade in your vehicle you will receive a confirmation stating the recycling in accordance with environmental regula tions EF Note Detailed information about the trade in and recycling of end of life cars is available from a specialist garage CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects General information 113 Driving through water on
307. tment on the passenger side The AUX and MDI inputs are used to connect external audio sources e g iPod or MP3 player and to play back music from these devices via the factory fitted radio or navigation system For a description of use refer to the relevant operating instructions for the ra dio or navigation system Communication and multimedia 101 CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Electronic immobilizer 102 Ignition lock 103 Starting the engine 103 Switching off the engine 103 The engine can only be started using a correctly coded original key The engine running noises may louder at first be louder for a short time after Starting the cold engine This is quite normal and is not an operating problem WARNING a When the vehicle is travelling with the engine off the ignition key must always be in position 2 Fig 102 on page 103 ignition switched on This position is indicated by the warning lights coming on If this is not the case it could result in unexpected locking of the steering wheel there is the risk of an accident Only pull the ignition key from the ignition lock when the vehicle has come to a complete stop by applying the handbrake Otherwise the steer ing wheel could lock there is the risk of an accident Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle Unauthor ized persons such as children for example could l
308. to the electronic stabilisation control ESC gt Antilock brake system ABS gt Traction control TCS gt Electronic Differential Lock EDL and XDS gt Hydraulic brake assist HBA gt Hill hold control HHC The ESC system cannot be deactivated The amp Fig 112 on page 116 button can only be used to deactivate the TCS The warning light comes on in the instrument cluster when the TCS is deactivated In the event of an ESC fault the ESC warning light illuminates in the instru ment cluster amp page 38 Hydraulic brake assist HBA HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance The HBA is activated by very rapid depression of the brake pedal To achieve the shortest possible braking distance the brake pedal must be applied firmly until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released ABS is activated sooner and more effectively with the intervention of HBA Assist systems 115 Hill hold control HHC HHC allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator ped al without having to use the handbrake when pulling away on a gradient The system holds the brake pressure produced by the activation of the brake pedal for approx 2 seconds after the brake pedal is released The brake pressure drops gradually the more you operate the accelerator ped al If the vehicle does not start off within 2
309. traint is at the same level as the upper part of your head B Fig 1 on page 7 page 7 Correctly fasten the seat belt page 10 Setting the seats and head restraints page 66 In exceptional cases the front passenger airbag can be deactiva ted page 17 Deactivating airbags E WARNING s Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the airbag system will not be able to properly protect you hazard Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven nev er place your feet on the instrument panel out of the window or on the surfaces of the seats You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident If an air bag is deployed you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect seated position Correct seated position of the rear seat passengers AN Read and observe H on page 7 first To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident the occupants on the rear seats must observe the following v Adjust the head restraint such that the top edge of the head restraint is at the same level as the upper part of the head B Fig 10n page 7 page 7 Y Correctly fasten the seat belt page 10 Wearing seat belts v Usea suitable child restraint system if transporting children in the vehi cle page 19 Transporting child
310. tries with a mild climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 25 C In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 40 Vehicles exported to countries with a cold climate are already factory filled with a coolant which offers antifreeze protection down to about 35 C In these countries the concentration of coolant additive should be at least 50 If a higher concentration of antifreeze is required for climatic reasons the amount of coolant additive can only be increased up to a maximum of 60 antifreeze protection down to approx 40 C When refilling only use the same antifreeze identified on the coolant expan sion vessel Fig 129 on page 145 HE WARNING a The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area While working in the engine compartment be sure to observe the following warn ings page 139 Do not continue your journey if for some reason it is not possible to top up the coolant under the current conditions Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage EE CAUTION The amount of coolant additive in the coolant must never be allowed to fall below 40 a Over 60 coolant additive in the coolant reduces the antifreeze protection and coolant effectiveness a A coolant additive that does not comply with the correct specifications can significantly reduce the corrosion protection a Any fau
311. trol engines Specification Ann 1 2 litres 44 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 2 1 51 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 4 1 63 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 6 1 77 kW VW 501 01 VW 502 00 1 4 1 132 kW TSI VW 502 00 1 2 1 63 kW TSI VW 502 00 1 2 1 77 kW TSI VW 502 00 If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 can be used once for refilling Specification Mme level VW 507 00 Diesel engines 1 2 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 1 6 1 55 kW TDI CR DPF VW 507 00 VW 507 00 1 6 1 66 kW TDI CR DPF 1 6 1 77 kW TDI CR DPF a Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without DPF If the oils specified above are not available oils according to ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 can be used once for refilling CAUTION Only the above mentioned oils can be used on vehicles with flexible service in tervals We recommend always refilling with oil of the same specification since this will maintain the properties of the oil In exceptional cases a maximum of 0 5 I of specification VW 502 00 only for petrol engines or specification VW 505 01 only for diesel engines engine oil can be used to refill once Other engine oils must not be used there is risk of engine damage Checking the oil level Fig 128 Principle sketch Dipstick A Read and observe H and on page 142 first The dipstick indicates the eng
312. trol min 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON or higher In an emergency if unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 95 RON is not available you may refuel with petrol with an octane rating of 91 92 or 93 RON gt F Prescribed fuel unleaded petrol 98 95 RON Use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON or higher Unleaded petrol 95 RON can also be used but results in a slight loss in performance In an emergency if unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 98 RON or 95 RON is not available you may refuel with petrol with an octane rating of 91 or 92 or 93 RON gt F Fuel additives Unleaded petrol complying with EN 228 meets all the conditions for a smooth running engine We therefore recommend that no fuel additives are used This can result in considerable damage to parts of the engine or the ex haust system Inspecting and replenishing 137 EE CAUTION Even filling the tank with leaded petrol that does not meet the standard once can lead to serious damage to parts of the exhaust system Do not start the engine or switch on the engine if you have refuelled in error with a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies with the standards refer red to above e g leaded petrol Engine parts could be significantly damaged We recommend that you have the fuel system cleaned by a specialist garage EE CAUTION a f in an emergency the vehicle has to be refuelled with petrol of a lower oc tane
313. ts as the pockets and the seat covers could be damaged Glasses storage box Fig 87 Detail of the headliner Glasses AI storage box A Read and observe H on page 81 first gt Press on the bar in the cover of the glasses storage The compartment folds down Fig 87 HU WARNING The compartment must only be opened when removing or inserting the spectacles and otherwise must be kept closed TE CAUTION Do not put any heat sensitive objects in the glasses storage box they may be damaged The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g Stowage compartment in centre console Fig 88 Centre console Stowage com partment I Read and observe H on page 81 first The open stowage compartment in the centre console Fig 88 Stowage compartment underneath the front passenger seat Fig 89 Front seat Stowage compart ment I Read and observe H on page 81 first gt Pull the handle to open the lid Fig 89 gt When closing the lid hold the handle until the compartment is closed E WARNING The storage compartment must always be closed when driving for safety reasons EE CAUTION The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 1 kg in weight Seats and storage 83 Front armrest with storage compartment B5J 0508 Fig 90 Armrest Storage compartment open storage compartment A Read and observe H on page 81 first Fold the armrest forwards gt
314. ts replaced however you should first contact your specialist garage to determine whether or not such parts can also be repaired Repairs to body parts are usually cheaper SKODA Original Accessories A Read and observe H on page 127 first You should note the following if you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle We recommend that you use SKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle KODA AUTO a s offers a warranty on the reliability safety and suitability for your particular vehicle of these accessories Although we constantly monitor the market we are not able to assess or offer a warranty on other products even though in some instances such products may have a type approval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised approval authority All accessory products go through a fastidious process of technical develop ment technical tests and quality inspection Customer tests and only if all tests are positive does the product become a SKODA Genuine Accessory Our SKODA Genuine Accessories service also provides expert advice and pro fessional fitting if requested by the customer SKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects in SKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with materials de fect liability legislation unless otherwise agreed in the purchase contract or in any other agreements You should keep the confirmed warranty certificate and the receipt for these accessori
315. uggage compart ment 162 Do it yourself Components of the breakdown kit Fig 145 Valve remover Sticker with max 80 km h max 50 mph speed designation Inflation hose with plug Air compressor Tyre inflation hose Tyre pressure indicator Air release valve ON and OFF switch 12 volt cable connector Tyre inflator bottle with sealing agent Replacement valve core FIle eee The valve remover 1 has a slot at its lower end which fits into the valve core This is the only way in which you can remove and re install the valve core from the tyre valve The same also applies to the replacement valve core n Preparations for using the breakdown kit N Read and observe H on page 162 first The following preparatory work must be carried out before using the break down kit gt Park the vehicle as far away as possible from the flow of traffic Park on as flat and firm a surface as possible gt If you are in flowing traffic switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the prescribed distance National legal requirements must be observed gt Have all the occupants get out The passengers should not stand on the road instead they should remain behind a crash barrier for instance while the wheel is being changed gt Switch off the engine and move the gearshift lever into Neutral or move the selector lever on the automatic gearbox into position P gt Apply the handbrake firmly gt
316. ulb N Read and observe H and H on page 170 first gt Remove rubber cover A Fig 154 on page 170 or 2 gt Grasp the lamp holder and remove it from the bulb housing gt Replace the light bulb and insert the lamp holder back into the headlamp with the bulb gt Fit the rubber cover Fuses and light bulbs 171 Foglights and daytime running lights Fig 158 Front bumper Protective grille removing the fog light CQ Read and observe H and H on page 170 first Bulb location Fig 158 A Bulb for daylight driving light Light bulb for fog lights Removing the cap gt Grasp the protective grille in the areas marked by the arrows Fig 158 A and remove the cover in the direction of the arrow Replacing light bulbs for fog lights daytime running lights gt Insert your hand into the opening in the protective grille and press the catch Fig 158 B in the direction of the arrow gt Remove the fog lamp gt Turn the connector with the bulb in counter clockwise up to the stop and re move gt Replace the bulb insert the holder with the new bulb and turn clockwise to the stop gt To re install the fog light first of all place the fog light with the lug on the side opposite the licence plate gt Press in the fog lamp on the side closest to the licence plate gt Insert the cap beginning with the lug on the side opposite the license plate gt Press in the cap on the side facing the license
317. until the next oil change service are dis played first the distance and the days remaining until the next inspection are displayed after the button 5 lis pressed again EF Note The kilometres remaining until the next service are displayed instead of the odometer Display in the MAXI DOT display Oil change service If an oil change service is due the message Oil change in km or days As soon as the service date has arrived the message Oil change now appears after the ignition is switched on Inspection If an inspection is due the message Inspection in km or days As soon as the service interval date has arrived the message Inspection now appears after the ignition is switched on Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval You can display the remaining distance and days until the next service in the Settings menu whenever the ignition is switched on page 34 The following message is displayed for 10 seconds Oil change km days Inspection km days CQO Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Main menu 33 Settings 34 Door boot lid and bonnet warning 34 Auto Check Control 34 The MAXI DOT display provides you with information about the current operat ing state of your vehicle The information system also provides you with data depending on the vehicle equipment relating to the radio mobile phone mul ti functi
318. ur vehicle can lead to faults there is a risk of an accident resulting in serious injury We recommend only having these modifications and technical changes performed by a specialist garage a Interference on the electronic components and their software can lead to operational faults This interference can also impair not directly affected systems because of the networking of the electronic components The op erational safety of the vehicle may be at significant risk and parts may suf fer increased wear a The KODA Partner cannot assume any liability for products which have not been approved by KODA AUTO a s even though these may be prod ucts with a type approval or have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory E WARNING We advise you only to use KODA Original Accessories and KODA Origi nal Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle Reli ability safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these KODA Original Accessories and KODA Original Parts can be purchased from a SKODA Partner who will also fit the purchased parts correctly For the sake of the environment Technical documents regarding changes carried out on the vehicle must be kept by the vehicle user in order to be handed over to the recyclers later This ensures that vehicle recycling is in accordance with environmental regulations FJ Note Any damage caused by technical alterations made withou
319. urban cycle 176 Technical data Note The fuel consumption and emission levels given on the Skoda websites or in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by legal or techni cal rules for the determination of operational and technical data of motor vehi cles Depending on the extent of the equipment the driving style traffic condi tions weather influences and vehicle condition consumption values can in practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ from the fuel consumption values listed on the SKODA websites or in the commer cial and technical vehicle documentation Dimensions Vehicle dimensions mm FABIA FABIA SCOUT FABIA RS ESTATE ela ESTATE SCOUT ESTATE RS GreenLine GreenLine 4000 4032 4029 4247 4247 4275 4276 1642 1658 1642 1642 1642 1658 1642 Width including exterior 1886 1886 1886 1886 1886 mirrors 1498 15137 1498 15137 1498 15137 r 1498 15137 Height 1484 1484 1484 1484 1484 Clearance 134 1499 119 134 135 1492 119 135 119 135 Wheelbase 2465 2465 2465 2465 2465 1433 1426 1433 1426 Track gauge front rear 1417 1410 1417 1410 1433 1426 1423 1415 1417 1410 1417 1410 1433 1426 1423 1415 1429 1422 1429 1422 a The value corresponds to the status with the rough road package b The value corresponds to the status with the sport chassis
320. usts the headlight beam thereby shortening the beam of light The positions of the rotary switch correspond approximately to the following car load Front seats occupied boot empty 1 All seats occupied boot empty 2 All seats occupied boot loaded 3 Driver seat occupied boot loaded H WARNING Always adjust the headlight beam to satisfy the following conditions The vehicle does not dazzle other road users especially oncoming vehi cles a The beam range is sufficient for safe driving Note We recommend you adjust the headlight beam when the low beam is switched on Daylight running lights DAY LIGHT CQ Read and observe H on page 56 first Switching on the daytime running lights gt Turn the light switch to position O Fig 40 on page 56 Activating deactivating the daytime running lights function gt Activate and deactivate the daytime running lights by fitting removing the fuse with the appropriate ampere rating for daytime running lights page 167 Fuses in the dash panel Deactivating on vehicles with the START STOP system gt Switch off the ignition gt At the same time pull the turn signal light stalk Fig 42 on page 58 to wards the steering wheel push it downwards and hold it in this position gt Switch on the ignition wait until the left turn signal light flashes 4x gt Switch off the ignition an audible signal sounds which confirms the deacti vation of the daylight driving l
321. vehicle can cause susceptible individuals to catch a cold F Note a We recommend that you have the air conditioning system cleaned by a spe cialist garage once every year During operation of the air conditioning under certain circumstances an in crease in engine idle speed may occur in order to ensure sufficient heating comfort Operation Fig 96 The air conditioning system Control elements CQ Read and observe M on page 89 first Functions of the individual controls Fig 96 A Set the temperature turn to the left to reduce the temperature turn to the right to increase the temperature Set the blower level level 0 blower off level 4 the highest blower speed Set the direction of the air outlet page 86 Switch recirculation on off page 90 A C Switch the cooling system on off EF Note The warning light in the symbol button A C lights after activation even if not all of the conditions for the function of the cooling system are met page 88 The operational readiness of the cooling system is indicated by the indicator light in the button lighting up Heating and air conditioning 89 Setting the air conditioning system N Read and observe on page 89 first Recommended basic settings of the air conditioning controls Control dial settings Fig 96 on page 89 AURON een ee Rages Air outlet vents 4 Fig 94 Settin j A on page 86 A C Defrost defog windscreen and
322. ver 3 the seat backrest will remain in the set position Front seat heating Fig 56 Rocker switch for front seat heating Ql Read and observe H on page 66 first The seat backrests and seats can be heated electrically gt Switch the front seat heating to 25 or 100 power by pressing rocker switch at position 1 or 2 Fig 56 gt To switch off the heating shift the rocker switch into the horizontal position WARNING If aS an occupant you have a subdued pain and or temperature sensitivity e g through medication paralysis or because of chronic illness e g diabe tes we recommend not to use the seat heating This can lead to burns on the back the posterior and the legs which are difficult to heal If the seat heating is used we recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey Please consult your doctor who can evaluate your specific condition CAUTION Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply pressure at specific points to avoid damaging the heating elements for the seat heaters Do not turn on the seat heater if seats are not occupied Do not switch on the seat heating if the seats have objects attached to or placed on them for example a child seat a bag etc A fault of the heating ele ments in the seat heating can occur a If additional seat covers or protective covers are attached to the s
323. ves difficult to undo the bolts carefully apply pressure to the end of the wrench with your foodt Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so and make Sure you keep your footing Raising the vehicle Fig 142 Jacking points for positioning lifting jack Fig 143 Attach lifting jack N Read and observe H on page 158 first Position the car jack below the jacking point closest to the flat tyre Fig 142 The jacking point is located directly below the engraving in the lower sill gt Wind the jack below the jacking point with the crank up until its claw is posi tioned below the vertical web of the lower sill gt Offer the jack up so that its claw encloses the web Fig 143 B gt Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the point where the claw encloses the web Fig 143 A gt Continue turning up the jack until the wheel is just about lifted off the ground H WARNING Only raise the vehicle at the jacking points Choose a flat and firm surface for jacking the vehicle Securing wheels against theft Fig 144 Principle sketch Anti theft wheel bolt with adapter N Read and observe H on page 158 first The anti theft wheel bolts can only be removed tightened with the aid of the adapter page 158 Vehicle tool kit gt Remove the cover from the anti theft wheel bolt gt Insert adapter B Fig 144
324. will sound as a warning The Warning at MAXI DOT display or segment display menu item appears in the display with the limit set Instruments and Indicator Lights 31 The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and on CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Prompt in the segment display 32 Display in the MAXI DOT display 33 A message concerning the kilometres and days remaining until the next service is due is shown for about 10 seconds after the ignition is switched on until the end of the service interval is reached The kilometre indicator or the days indicator reduces in steps of 100 km or days until the service due date is reached Resetting the oil change service indicator in a specialist dealer s For vehicles with variable service intervals after resetting the screen displays the values of a new service interval is displayed which are based on the previ ous operating conditions of the vehicle These values are then further continuously matched according to the actual operating conditions of the vehicle F Note a Information is retained in the Service Interval Display even after the vehicle battery is disconnected a f the instrument cluster is exchanged after a repair the correct values must be entered in the counter for the Service Interval Display This work will be done by a specialist garage For more information on the service
325. witched on no one must be in the car as it is then not possible to open either a door or a window from the inside The locked doors make it more difficult for rescu ers to get into the vehicle in an emergency risk to life Note This function is only enabled in certain countries Unlocking the vehicle using the key Fig 31 Turning the key for unlocking and locking the vehicle QI Read and observe M on page 46 first gt Turn the key in the locking cylinder of the driver s door in the direction of travel unlocking position A Fig 31 gt Pull the door handle and open the door gt All the doors only the driver s door on vehicles with anti theft alarm system are unlocked gt The boot lid is then unlocked gt The switched on interior lights come on over the door contact gt The safe securing system is deactivated gt The windows open while the key is held in the unlock position gt The warning light in the driver door stops flashing if the car is not fitted with an anti theft alarm system page 49 Note If the vehicle is equipped with an anti theft alarm system you must insert the key into the ignition lock and switch the ignition on within 15 seconds after un locking the door in order to deactivate the anti theft alarm system The alarm is triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds Locking the vehicle with the key A Read and observe M on page 46 first gt Turn the ke
326. with its toothed end fully into the inner toothing of the anti theft wheel bolt A to the stop so that only the outer hexagon projects gt Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter B up to the stop gt Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt page 160 gt After removing the adapter replace the cap on the anti theft wheel bolt gt Have the tightening torque checked with a torque wrench as soon as possi ble Note a Make a note of the code number hammered into the rear side of the adapter or the rear side of the anti theft wheel bolt This number can be used to pur chase a SKODA Original Parts replacement adapter if necessary We recommend that you always carry the adapter for the wheel bolts with you in the vehicle It should be stowed in the vehicle tool kit The anti theft wheel bolt set and adapter can be purchased from a KODA Partner CQ Introduction This chapter contains information on the following subjects Breakdown kit 162 Preparations for using the breakdown kit 162 Sealing and inflating the tyre 163 Check after 10 minutes driving 163 Use the breakdown kit to reliably repair tyre damage caused by foreign bodies or a puncture with diameters up to approx 4 mm A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma nent repair on the tyre Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga rage The wheel need not be removed during the repair Do not remove foreign bodie
327. y Airbag belt tensioner deactivated If the front passenger s front airbag was switched off using the key operat ed switch on the side of the dash panel on the passenger side gt The warning light comes on for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on gt switching off the airbag is indicated in the middle of the dash panel by the lighting up of the yellow indicator light in display PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Re page 18 E WARNING When a fault of the airbag system occurs there is a risk of the system not being triggered in the event of an accident Therefore this is to be checked immediately by a specialized company 1 Tyre pressure N Read and observe H on page 35 first The warning light 4 lights up if there is a substantial drop in inflation pres sure in one of the tyres Check and adjust the pressure in all tyres If the indicator light 1 flashes there is a fault in the tyre pressure monitoring system Stop the car turn the ignition off and on again If the warning light flashes again after re starting the engine then the help of a professional service provider is to be sought Further information page 154 Tyre pressure monitor E WARNING If you have to stop for technical reasons then park the vehicle at a safe distance from the traffic switch off the engine and activate the hazard warning lights system page 60 Note If the battery has been disconnected the warning light
328. y drive at a speed of 30 km h to 50 km h the forces that your body is exposed to in the event of an accident can exceed a ton 1000 kg For example a person s weight of 80 kg increases at 50 km h to 4 8 tons 4800 kg In the event of a frontal collision occupants of the car not wearing a seat belt are thrown forward and strike parts of the interior of the car such as the steering wheel dash panel windscreen in ways which cannot be control led Fig 4 A In certain circumstances you could even be thrown out of the vehicle which could cause life threatening or even fatal injuries Seat belts 11 It is also important that rear passengers fasten their seat belts as they could otherwise be thrown through the vehicle in an uncontrolled manner in the event of an accident A rear seat passenger who has not fastened the seat belt is a danger not only to himself but also for those seated in the front Fig 4 B Fastening and unfastening seat belts BNH 0111 Fig 6 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap belt Rout ing of belt webbing for an expectant mother N Read and observe H on page 10 first Fasten gt Correctly adjust the front seat and head restraint before fastening the seat belt page 69 gt Use the lock tongue to slowly pull the webbing over your chest and pelvis 12 Safety gt Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle belonging to the seat Fig 5 A until it you hear
329. y in the locking cylinder of the driver s door opposite to the direc tion of travel locking position B Fig 31 on page 47 gt All the doors and the boot lid are locked gt The switched on interior lights will switch off over the door contact gt The windows and the electric sliding tilting roof close while the key is held in the lock position gt The safe securing system is immediately activated gt The warning light in the driver door begins flashing Note If the driver s door has been opened the vehicle cannot be locked Vehicle locking unlocking from the inside Fig 32 Centre console Central locking button zat D N Read and observe M on page 46 first B5J 0456 If the vehicle was not locked from the outside you can also unlock and lock it with the rocker switch Fig 32 even if the ignition is not switched on Locking all doors and the boot lid gt Press e on the button Fig 32 The symbol in the button comes on Unlocking all doors and the boot lid gt Press on the button Fig 32 The symbol in the button is no longer illuminated Unlocking andlocking 47 The following applies if your vehicle has been locked using the central locking button gt It is not possible to open the doors or the boot lid from the outside safety feature e g when stopping at traffic lights etc gt The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever of t

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sencor SRM 1500WH rice cooker  Nextbook Premium 7 Google Play Quick Start Guide    ヤマハアクセサリー取扱説明書  WA 5612_GB  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file